Nikon Digital Camera 1544 User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA  
User's Manual  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to Find It  
Find what you’re looking for from:  
0 vi–xi  
The Table of Contents  
Find items by function or menu name.  
i
i
0 ii–v  
The Q&A Index  
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it from  
the “question and answer” index.  
0 232–234  
The Index  
Search by key word.  
i
i
i
0 221–223  
Error Messages  
If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor, find the solution here.  
0 216–220  
Troubleshooting  
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.  
A For Your Safety  
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety”  
(0 xii).  
Help  
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page 13  
for details.  
Digitutor  
“Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following  
website: http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q&A Index  
0
0
0
ii  
vi  
1
Table of Contents  
Introduction  
X
s
x
y
z
t
I
Q
o
i
L
g
u
w
n
Basic Photography and Playback  
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
More on Photography (All Modes)  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
0 27  
0 41  
0 49  
0 53  
0 79  
0 115  
0 131  
0 146  
0 148  
0 153  
0 165  
0 174  
0 190  
0 193  
More on Playback  
Connections  
The Playback Menu  
The Shooting Menu  
Custom Settings  
The Setup Menu  
The Retouch Menu  
Recent Settings /  
Technical Notes  
My Menu  
v
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q&A Index  
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index.  
Camera Displays  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
The information display 8, 167  
What do these icons mean?  
The viewfinder  
6
Number of exposures  
remaining  
How many more shots can I take with this card?  
29  
How much charge does the battery have left?  
How do I keep the displays from turning off?  
How do I display the menus in another language?  
How do I adjust monitor brightness?  
Battery level  
Auto off timers  
Language  
28  
157  
169  
166  
158  
LCD brightness  
Grid display  
Can I display a framing grid in the viewfinder?  
How do I view more information about a photo?  
Photo information 117–121  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Photographs  
Question  
Key phrase  
Auto modes  
Scene modes  
0
Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots?  
How do I quickly adjust settings for different scenes?  
Can I frame photos in the monitor?  
28–32  
33–38  
41–47  
45  
Live view  
Can I angle the monitor for easier framing?  
Can I shoot movies?  
Recording movies  
50–51  
How do I take pictures for printing at large sizes?  
How can I get more pictures on the memory card?  
Can I take pictures with a small file size for e-mail?  
Can I choose how the camera focuses?  
Image quality and size 62–64  
Focus mode  
Focus point  
54–55  
58  
Can I choose the focus point?  
Can I change the composition without refocusing?  
How do I focus on a subject that is not in a focus area?  
Can I set the flash to fire automatically when needed?  
How do I avoid “red-eye”?  
3D-tracking  
57  
Focus lock  
58  
Auto flash  
71–72  
71–72  
30  
Red-eye reduction  
Auto (flash off) mode  
Flash off  
How do I keep the flash from firing?  
70–72  
155  
How do I turn off the light on the front of the camera?  
How do I shoot a series of photos in quick succession?  
Can I reduce camera noise in quiet surroundings?  
How do I take pictures with the self-timer?  
How do I use the optional remote control?  
What is exposure?  
AF-assist illuminator  
Release mode  
65–66  
Self-timer  
Remote control  
Exposure  
67–69  
80  
How do I “freeze” motion?  
Mode S (shutter-priority  
82  
auto)  
How do I suggest motion by blurring moving objects?  
Mode A (aperture-  
priority auto)  
Can I blur the background to bring out a subject?  
83  
90  
Can I make photos brighter or darker?  
Exposure compensation  
How do I create “light trails” behind moving objects?  
How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights?  
Can I take photos at preset intervals?  
Long time-exposures 86–87  
Active D-Lighting 94–95  
Interval timer shooting 76–77  
How do I focus the viewfinder?  
Viewfinder focus  
Beep  
25  
How do I keep the camera from beeping?  
158  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing, Retouching, and Printing Photographs  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I view photographs on the camera?  
Playback  
39, 116  
40,  
126–128  
How do I delete unwanted photos?  
Deleting photos  
Can I zoom in on photos during playback?  
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion?  
Can I view photos in an automatic slide show?  
Can I view photos on HD or standard TVs?  
How do I copy photos to a computer?  
Playback zoom  
Protect  
124  
125  
Slide show  
129  
Viewing on TV  
Computer  
132–133  
134–135  
136–144  
138, 141  
143  
How do I print photos?  
Printing  
Can I print the date of recording on my photos?  
How do I order professional prints?  
Time stamp  
Print set (DPOF)  
Retouch  
Can I create retouched copies of photos?  
How do I remove “red-eye”?  
174–189  
176  
Red-eye correction  
Image overlay  
NEF (RAW) processing  
Color outline  
Can I overlay two photos to make a single image?  
How do I make JPEG copies of RAW (NEF) photos?  
Can I copy a photo to use as a base for a painting?  
Can I make stop-motion movies from my photos?  
182–183  
184  
186  
Stop-motion movie 187–188  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus and Settings  
Question  
Key phrase  
Using the menus  
Help  
0
13–15  
13  
How do I use the menus?  
How do I get help for a menu or message?  
Error messages  
221  
The information display 8, 9  
How do I adjust settings?  
The command dial  
Menus  
10–12  
145–192  
78  
How do I restore default settings?  
How do I set the camera clock?  
Two-button reset  
Time zone and date  
20, 169  
How do I keep the file number from being reset when I  
insert a new memory card?  
File number sequence  
159  
How do I reset file numbering to 1?  
Is there a quick way to access frequently-used settings?  
Is there a quick way to access recently-used settings?  
My Menu  
191  
190  
Recent settings  
Miscellaneous  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
What do I do with the eyepiece cap?  
What memory cards can I use?  
What lenses can I use?  
The DK-5 eyepiece cap 67, 77  
Approved memory cards 203  
Compatible lenses  
Optional flash units  
194  
198  
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use?  
What software is available for my camera?  
What other accessories are available for my camera?  
How do I clean the camera?  
Accessories  
202  
Cleaning  
Servicing  
205  
205  
Who do I go to for servicing and repairs?  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Q&A Index .................................................................................................................................... ii  
For Your Safety ......................................................................................................................... xii  
Notices........................................................................................................................................xiv  
Introduction  
1
Overview....................................................................................................................................... 2  
Getting to Know the Camera................................................................................................. 3  
The Camera Body ......................................................................................................................3  
The Mode Dial.............................................................................................................................5  
The Viewfinder............................................................................................................................6  
The Monitor.................................................................................................................................7  
The Information Display..........................................................................................................8  
The Command Dial ................................................................................................................ 10  
The Power Switch................................................................................................................... 12  
Camera Menus..........................................................................................................................13  
Using Camera Menus ............................................................................................................ 14  
First Steps ...................................................................................................................................16  
Charge the Battery................................................................................................................. 16  
Insert the Battery .................................................................................................................... 17  
Attach a Lens............................................................................................................................ 18  
Basic Setup................................................................................................................................ 20  
Insert a Memory Card............................................................................................................ 22  
Format the Memory Card .................................................................................................... 23  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...................................................................................................... 25  
Basic Photography and Playback  
27  
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes)...................................................28  
Step 1: Turn the Camera On................................................................................................ 28  
Step 2: Select i or j Mode ............................................................................................... 30  
Step 3: Frame the Photograph .......................................................................................... 30  
Step 4: Focus ............................................................................................................................ 31  
Step 5: Shoot ............................................................................................................................ 32  
Creative Photography (Scene Modes) .............................................................................33  
k Portrait .............................................................................................................................. 34  
l Landscape........................................................................................................................ 34  
p Child .................................................................................................................................. 34  
m Sports ................................................................................................................................ 34  
n Close Up ........................................................................................................................... 35  
o Night Portrait.................................................................................................................. 35  
r Night Landscape ........................................................................................................... 35  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
s Party/Indoor....................................................................................................................35  
t Beach/Snow ....................................................................................................................36  
u Sunset................................................................................................................................36  
v Dusk/Dawn......................................................................................................................36  
w Pet Portrait.......................................................................................................................36  
x Candlelight........................................................................................................................37  
y Blossom.............................................................................................................................37  
z Autumn Colors ...............................................................................................................37  
0 Food....................................................................................................................................37  
1 Silhouette.........................................................................................................................38  
2 High Key............................................................................................................................38  
3 Low Key.............................................................................................................................38  
Basic Playback...........................................................................................................................39  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs.....................................................................................40  
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)  
41  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor ..............................................................................42  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
49  
Recording Movies....................................................................................................................50  
Viewing Movies ........................................................................................................................52  
More on Photography (All Modes)  
53  
Focus ............................................................................................................................................54  
Focus Mode...............................................................................................................................54  
AF-Area Mode ..........................................................................................................................56  
Focus Point Selection ............................................................................................................58  
Focus Lock.................................................................................................................................58  
Manual Focus ...........................................................................................................................60  
Image Quality and Size..........................................................................................................62  
Image Quality...........................................................................................................................62  
Image Size..................................................................................................................................64  
Release Mode............................................................................................................................65  
Self-Timer and Remote Modes...........................................................................................67  
Using the Built-in Flash..........................................................................................................70  
Flash Mode................................................................................................................................71  
ISO Sensitivity............................................................................................................................74  
Interval Timer Photography.................................................................................................76  
Two-Button Reset ....................................................................................................................78  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
79  
Shutter Speed and Aperture ...............................................................................................80  
Mode P (Programmed Auto).............................................................................................. 81  
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto).......................................................................................... 82  
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto) ...................................................................................... 83  
Mode M (Manual) ................................................................................................................... 84  
Exposure .....................................................................................................................................88  
Metering .................................................................................................................................... 88  
Autoexposure Lock................................................................................................................ 89  
Exposure Compensation...................................................................................................... 90  
Flash Compensation.............................................................................................................. 92  
Active D-Lighting.................................................................................................................... 94  
White Balance ...........................................................................................................................96  
Fine-Tuning White Balance................................................................................................. 98  
Preset Manual .......................................................................................................................... 99  
Bracketing ............................................................................................................................... 103  
Picture Controls..................................................................................................................... 106  
Selecting a Picture Control................................................................................................106  
Modifying Existing Picture Controls ..............................................................................108  
Creating Custom Picture Controls..................................................................................111  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls ...................................................................................113  
The GP-1 GPS Unit................................................................................................................ 114  
More on Playback  
115  
Full-Frame Playback............................................................................................................. 116  
Photo Information................................................................................................................117  
Thumbnail Playback ............................................................................................................ 122  
Calendar Playback................................................................................................................ 123  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................................................... 124  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion........................................................................ 125  
Deleting Photographs ........................................................................................................ 126  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback........................................................126  
The Playback Menu..............................................................................................................127  
Slide Shows............................................................................................................................. 129  
Connections  
131  
Viewing Photographs on TV............................................................................................. 132  
Standard Definition Devices.............................................................................................132  
High-Definition Devices.....................................................................................................133  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................................................... 134  
Before Connecting the Camera ...................................................................................... 134  
Connecting the Camera .................................................................................................... 135  
Printing Photographs.......................................................................................................... 136  
Connecting the Printer ...................................................................................................... 136  
Printing Pictures One at a Time ...................................................................................... 137  
Printing Multiple Pictures ................................................................................................. 139  
Creating Index Prints .......................................................................................................... 142  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set......................................................................... 143  
Menu Guide  
145  
D The Playback Menu: ManagingImages............................................................................ 146  
Playback Folder................................................................................................................ 146  
Display Mode .................................................................................................................... 146  
Image Review ................................................................................................................... 147  
Rotate Tall .......................................................................................................................... 147  
C The Shooting Menu: ShootingOptions............................................................................. 148  
ISO Sensitivity Settings.................................................................................................. 149  
Auto Distortion Control ................................................................................................ 150  
Color Space........................................................................................................................ 150  
Long Exp. NR..................................................................................................................... 151  
High ISO NR ....................................................................................................................... 151  
Active Folder..................................................................................................................... 152  
A Custom Settings: Fine-TuningCameraSettings .................................................................. 153  
A: Reset Custom Settings ............................................................................................ 154  
a: Autofocus ........................................................................................................................... 155  
a1: AF-area Mode............................................................................................................. 155  
a2: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator................................................................................. 155  
a3: Live View Autofocus................................................................................................ 155  
a4: Rangefinder................................................................................................................ 156  
b: Exposure............................................................................................................................. 156  
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.................................................................................. 156  
c: Timers/AE Lock................................................................................................................. 156  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L ................................................................................ 156  
c2: Auto off Timers.......................................................................................................... 157  
c3: Self-Timer..................................................................................................................... 157  
c4: Remote on Duration................................................................................................ 157  
d: Shooting/Display............................................................................................................. 158  
d1: Beep .............................................................................................................................. 158  
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ......................................................................................... 158  
d3: ISO Display.................................................................................................................. 158  
d4: File Number Sequence........................................................................................... 159  
d5: Exposure Delay Mode............................................................................................. 159  
d6: Date Imprint............................................................................................................... 160  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d7: Live View Display Options .....................................................................................161  
e: Bracketing/Flash...............................................................................................................162  
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash ..................................................................................162  
e2: Auto Bracketing Set .................................................................................................162  
f: Controls ................................................................................................................................163  
f1: Assign E/Fn Button ..................................................................................................163  
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button .........................................................................................164  
f3: Reverse Dial Rotation................................................................................................164  
f4: No Memory Card? ......................................................................................................164  
f5: Reverse Indicators......................................................................................................164  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.......................................................................................... 165  
LCD Brightness..................................................................................................................166  
Info Display Format.........................................................................................................166  
Auto Information Display..............................................................................................168  
Info Wrap-around ............................................................................................................168  
Video Mode........................................................................................................................168  
HDMI.....................................................................................................................................168  
Time Zone and Date .......................................................................................................169  
Language............................................................................................................................169  
Image Comment ..............................................................................................................169  
Auto Image Rotation ......................................................................................................170  
Image Dust off Ref Photo..............................................................................................171  
Eye-Fi Upload ....................................................................................................................173  
Firmware Version .............................................................................................................173  
N The Retouch Menu: CreatingRetouchedCopies ................................................................. 174  
Creating Retouched Copies..............................................................................................175  
D-Lighting...........................................................................................................................176  
Red-Eye Correction..........................................................................................................176  
Trim.......................................................................................................................................177  
Monochrome.....................................................................................................................178  
Filter Effects........................................................................................................................178  
Color Balance.....................................................................................................................179  
Small Picture......................................................................................................................180  
Image Overlay ...................................................................................................................182  
NEF (RAW) Processing ....................................................................................................184  
Quick Retouch...................................................................................................................185  
Straighten...........................................................................................................................185  
Distortion Control............................................................................................................185  
Fisheye.................................................................................................................................185  
Color Outline .....................................................................................................................186  
Perspective Control.........................................................................................................186  
Stop-Motion Movie .........................................................................................................187  
Side-by-Side Comparison .............................................................................................189  
m Recent Settings/O My Menu....................................................................................... 190  
m Recent Settings: Viewing Recent Settings..............................................................190  
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu.........................................................................191  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Notes  
193  
Compatible Lenses............................................................................................................... 194  
Compatible CPU Lenses .................................................................................................... 194  
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses .......................................................................................... 195  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)................................................................................. 198  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ................................................................. 198  
Other Accessories ................................................................................................................. 202  
Approved Memory Cards.................................................................................................. 203  
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter........................................................ 204  
Caring for the Camera......................................................................................................... 205  
Storage..................................................................................................................................... 205  
Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 205  
The Low-Pass Filter.............................................................................................................. 206  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions............................................................. 210  
Available Settings................................................................................................................. 212  
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................................................... 215  
Exposure Program................................................................................................................ 216  
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 217  
Display ..................................................................................................................................... 217  
Shooting (All Modes).......................................................................................................... 218  
Shooting (P, S, A, M)........................................................................................................... 219  
Playback .................................................................................................................................. 220  
Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................ 220  
Error Messages....................................................................................................................... 221  
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 224  
Battery Life ............................................................................................................................. 231  
Index.......................................................................................................................................... 232  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following  
safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions  
where all those who use the product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this  
section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using  
this Nikon product.  
A
WARNINGS  
Keep the sun out of the frame  
Do not disassemble  
A
A
Keep the sun well out of the frame when  
shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight  
focused into the camera when the sun is  
in or close to the frame could cause a fire.  
Touching the product’s internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified technician.  
Should the product break open as the  
result of a fall or other accident, remove  
the battery and/or AC adapter and then  
take the product to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
A
A
Using the viewfinder diopter control  
Do not place the strap around the neck of an  
infant or child  
Placing the camera strap around the neck  
of an infant or child could result in  
strangulation.  
A
A
When operating the viewfinder diopter  
control with your eye to the viewfinder,  
care should be taken not to put your  
finger in your eye accidentally.  
Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an unusual  
smell coming from the equipment or AC  
adapter (available separately), unplug  
the AC adapter and remove the battery  
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.  
Continued operation could result in  
injury. After removing the battery, take  
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
A
Observe caution when using the flash  
Using the camera with the flash in close  
contact with the skin or other objects  
could cause burns.  
Using the flash close to the subject’s  
eyes could cause temporary visual  
impairment. Particular care should be  
observed when photographing infants,  
when the flash should be no less than  
one meter (39 in.) from the subject.  
Do not use in the presence of flammable gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in the  
presence of flammable gas, as this could  
result in explosion or fire.  
A
A
Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
A
Should the monitor break, care should be  
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass  
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes or mouth.  
Keep out of reach of children  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in injury.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Observe proper precautions when handling  
batteries  
Observe proper precautions when handling the  
quick charger  
A
A
Batteries may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling  
batteries for use in this product:  
Use only batteries approved for use in  
this equipment.  
Do not short or disassemble the battery.  
Be sure the product is off before  
replacing the battery. If you are using  
an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.  
Do not attempt to insert the battery  
upside down or backwards.  
Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or electric  
shock.  
Dust on or near the metal parts of the  
plug should be removed with a dry  
cloth. Continued use could result in fire.  
Do not handle the power cable or go  
nearthe chargerduringthunderstorms.  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in electric shock.  
Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug  
or bend the power cable. Do not place  
it under heavy objects or expose it to  
heat or flame. Should the insulation be  
damaged and the wires become  
exposed, take the power cable to a  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative for inspection. Failure to  
observe this precaution could result in  
fire or electric shock.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or to  
excessive heat.  
Do not immerse in or expose to water.  
Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store the battery with  
metal objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
Batteries are prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage to  
the product, be sure to remove the  
battery when no charge remains.  
When the battery is not in use, attach  
the terminal cover and store in a cool,  
dry place.  
The battery may be hot immediately  
after use or when the product has been  
used on battery power for an extended  
period. Before removing the battery  
turn the camera off and allow the  
battery to cool.  
Do not handle the plug or charger with  
wet hands. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in electric  
shock.  
Do not use with travel converters or  
adapters designed to convert from one  
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC  
inverters. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the product  
or cause overheating or fire.  
Use appropriate cables  
A
A
When connecting cables to the input and  
output jacks, use only the cables  
provided or sold by Nikon for the  
purpose to maintain compliance with  
product regulations.  
Discontinue use immediately should  
you notice any changes in the battery,  
such as discoloration or deformation.  
CD-ROMs  
CD-ROMs containing software or  
manuals should not be played back on  
audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs  
on an audio CD player could cause  
hearing loss or damage the equipment.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
No part of the manuals included with this  
product may be reproduced, transmitted,  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or  
translated into any language in any form,  
by any means, without Nikon’s prior  
written permission.  
Nikon will not be held liable for any  
damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
While every effort has been made to  
ensure that the information in these  
manuals is accurate and complete, we  
would appreciate it were you to bring any  
errors or omissions to the attention of the  
Nikon representative in your area (address  
provided separately).  
Nikon reserves the right to change the  
specifications of the hardware and  
software described in these manuals at any  
time and without prior notice.  
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
D5000  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to  
correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
The FCC requires the user be notified that any  
changes or modifications made to this device  
that are not expressly approved by Nikon  
Corporation may void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided by  
Nikon for your equipment. Using other  
interface cables may exceed the limits of  
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product  
may expose you to lead, a chemical known to  
the State of California to cause birth defects  
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville,  
New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices for Customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est  
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Notice for Customers in Europe  
This symbol indicates that this  
product is to be collected  
separately.  
This symbol on the battery  
indicates that the battery is to be  
collected separately.  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
This product is designated for separate  
collection at an appropriate collection  
point. Do not dispose of as household  
waste.  
For more information, contact the retailer  
or the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
All batteries, whether marked with this  
symbol or not, are designated for separate  
collection at an appropriate collection  
point. Do not dispose of as household  
waste.  
For more information, contact the retailer  
or the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices  
does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered  
from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in  
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s  
responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all  
data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it  
with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to  
also replace any pictures selected for preset manual white balance (0 99). Care should be  
taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.  
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries, AC adapters,  
and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are  
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this  
electronic circuitry.  
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may  
void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not  
bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal  
operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced  
by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.  
Items prohibited by law from being copied or  
reproduced  
Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
The government has issued cautions on  
copies or reproductions of securities issued  
by private companies (shares, bills, checks,  
gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or  
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of  
necessary copies are to be provided for  
business use by a company. Also, do not  
copy or reproduce passports issued by the  
government, licenses issued by public  
agencies and private groups, ID cards, and  
tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,  
coins, securities, government bonds, or  
local government bonds, even if such  
copies or reproductions are stamped  
“Sample.”  
The copying or reproduction of paper  
money, coins, or securities which are  
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused postage  
stamps or post cards issued by the  
government is prohibited.  
Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted  
creative works such as books, music,  
paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps,  
drawings, movies, and photographs is  
governed by national and international  
copyright laws. Do not use this product for  
the purpose of making illegal copies or to  
infringe copyright laws.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps  
issued by the government and of certified  
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.  
A Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the  
camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon  
will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
A Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and  
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:  
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to  
frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.  
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the  
following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
X
This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera,  
including the names of camera parts, how to use the camera menus, and how to  
ready the camera for use.  
X
Overview.........................................................................................................................  
2
Getting to Know the Camera.......................................................................................  
The Camera Body........................................................................................................................  
The Mode Dial ..............................................................................................................................  
The Viewfinder.............................................................................................................................  
The Monitor...................................................................................................................................  
The Information Display...........................................................................................................  
3
3
5
6
7
8
The Command Dial..................................................................................................................... 10  
The Power Switch........................................................................................................................ 12  
Camera Menus ............................................................................................................... 13  
Using Camera Menus................................................................................................................. 14  
First Steps........................................................................................................................ 16  
Charge the Battery ..................................................................................................................... 16  
Insert the Battery ........................................................................................................................ 17  
Attach a Lens ................................................................................................................................ 18  
Basic Setup .................................................................................................................................... 20  
Insert a Memory Card................................................................................................................ 22  
Format the Memory Card......................................................................................................... 23  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus........................................................................................................... 25  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview  
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera. To get  
the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and  
keep them where they will be read by all who use the product.  
Symbols and Conventions  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and  
conventions are used:  
X
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to  
prevent damage to the camera.  
D
A
0
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the  
camera.  
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.  
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital  
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety  
requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR  
NIKON WARRANTY.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the  
camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative  
once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that  
fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly  
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the  
camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is  
inspected or serviced.  
A Camera Settings  
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You  
may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the  
rest of the manual.  
The Camera Body  
11  
1
2
X
21  
22  
3
4
5
12  
6
7
8
13  
14  
23  
24  
15  
16  
17  
9
25  
10  
18  
19  
20  
1 Mode dial...................................5 8 Infrared receiver .................... 68 18 Lens release button...............19  
2 Focal plane mark (E) ...........61 9 Body cap  
3 R (information) button.........8 10 CPU contacts  
19 Mirror...............................42, 208  
20 Lens mount .............................61  
Two-button reset button.....78  
4 E (exposure compensation)  
button ...................................90  
N (aperture) button .............84  
Flash compensation  
11 Built-in flash............................ 70 21 Accessory shoe cover......... 198  
12 M (flash mode) button ......... 70 22 Accessory shoe (for optional  
Y (flash compensation)  
button................................... 93  
13 Eyelet for camera strap  
flash unit)........................... 198  
23 Accessory terminal ............. 203  
24 USB connector  
button ...................................93  
5 Shutter-release button.........32  
6 Power switch...........................28  
7 AF-assist illuminator .............55  
Self-timer lamp ......................68  
Red-eye reduction lamp ......72  
14 Microphone ............................ 51  
15 Connector cover  
16 E (self-timer) button ........... 69  
Fn (function) button ...........163  
17 Mounting index..................... 18  
Connecting to a computer  
............................................. 135  
Connecting to a printer.. 136  
A/V connector...................... 132  
25 HDMI mini-pin connector  
............................................. 133  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Camera Body (Continued)  
2
11  
1
12  
13  
14  
15  
3
X
4
5
6
16  
17  
18  
19  
7
8
9
20  
21  
22  
10  
1 Viewfinder eyepiece............. 25 7 W (thumbnail/playback  
14 a (live view) button  
zoom out) button.............122  
Q (help) button.......................13  
8 X (playback zoom in)  
Taking photographs.......... 41  
Shooting movies................ 49  
15 Memory card slot cover....... 22  
16 Multi selector ......................... 14  
17 J (OK) button....................... 14  
18 Memory card access lamp  
..........................................22, 32  
19 Speaker  
2 DK-24 rubber eyecup  
3 Monitor  
Viewing settings ...................8  
Live view .............................. 41  
button .................................124  
Viewing pictures ................ 39 9 P (information edit)  
button ..................................... 9  
Two-button reset button.....78  
Deleting pictures ............... 40 10 Tripod socket  
Full-frame playback......... 116  
4 O (delete) button  
Deleting pictures during  
playback............................. 126  
5 K (playback) button .. 39, 116  
6 G (menu) button .... 13, 145  
11 Diopter adjustment  
control...................................25  
12 A (AE-L/AF-L)  
button ..........................59, 164  
L (protect) button...........125  
13 Command dial........................10  
20 Power connector cover for  
optional power connector  
..............................................204  
21 Battery-chamber cover latch  
................................................ 17  
22 Battery-chamber cover........ 17  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Mode Dial  
The camera offers a choice of the following shooting modes:  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Select these modes for full control over camera settings.  
P—Programmed auto (0 81): Camera chooses A—Aperture-priority auto (0 83): Adjust  
shutter speed and aperture, user controls  
other settings.  
aperture to soften background details or  
increase depth-of-field to bring both main  
subject and background into focus.  
X
S —Shutter-priority auto (0 82): Choose fast  
M—Manual (0 84): Match shutter speed and  
shutter speeds to freeze action, slow shutter aperture to your creative intent.  
speeds to suggest motion by blurring  
moving objects.  
Auto Modes  
Select these modes for simple, point-and-  
shoot photography.  
i Auto (0 28): Camera adjusts settings automati-  
cally to produce optimal results with “point-and-  
shoot” simplicity. Recommended for first-time  
users of digital cameras.  
j Auto (flash off) (0 28): As above, except that the  
flash will not fire even when lighting is poor.  
Scene Modes  
Selecting a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected  
scene.  
k Portrait (0 34): Shoot portraits with back- m Sports (0 34): Freeze motion for dynamic  
ground in soft focus.  
sports shots.  
l Landscape (0 34): Preserve details in  
landscape shots.  
n Close up (0 35): Take vivid close-ups of  
flowers, insects, and other small objects.  
p Child (0 34): Create portraits of children. o Night portrait (0 35): Shoot portraits  
Clothing and background details are vividly against a dimly-lit backdrop.  
rendered while skin tones remain soft and  
h (other scenes; 0 33): Other scenes can  
natural.  
be selected with the command dial.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Viewfinder  
5
1
X
6 7  
8
9
10 11  
12 13 14  
20  
2
3
4
15  
16  
17 19  
18  
1 Framing grid (displayed when 12 Number of exposures  
13 “K” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures) ........................... 29  
14 Flash-ready indicator ........... 32  
15 Flexible program  
indicator............................... 81  
16 Exposure indicator................ 85  
Exposure compensation  
display .................................. 90  
17 Flash compensation  
indicator............................... 92  
18 Exposure compensation  
indicator............................... 90  
19 Auto ISO sensitivity  
On is selected for Custom  
Setting d2)......................... 158  
2 Reference circle for center-  
weighted metering ........... 88  
3 “No memory card” indicator  
4 Battery indicator ................... 28  
5 Focus points ........................... 58  
6 Focus indicator ................31, 61  
7 Autoexposure (AE) lock  
remaining ............................29  
Number of shots remaining  
before memory buffer  
fills..........................................66  
White balance recording  
indicator ...............................99  
Exposure compensation value  
................................................90  
Flash compensation  
value......................................92  
Capture mode indicator.....134  
ISO sensitivity .........................74  
indicator............................... 89  
8 Shutter speed ..................82, 84  
9 Aperture (f-number) ......83, 84  
10 Battery indicator ................... 28  
11 Bracketing indicator........... 103  
indicator.............................149  
20 Warning indicator ...............221  
D No Battery  
When the battery is exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the viewfinder will  
dim. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The viewfinder display will return  
to normal when a fully-charged battery is inserted.  
D The Viewfinder Display  
Owing to the characteristics of this type of viewfinder display, you may notice fine lines  
radiating outward from the selected focus point. This is normal and does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
D The Viewfinder  
The response time and brightness of the viewfinder may vary with temperature.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Monitor  
The monitor opens outwards 180° and can be rotated 180° left or 90° right as shown  
below, allowing the monitor to be angled for high- and low-angle photography or  
rotated to face the user for self-portraits (0 45).  
X
180°  
90°  
180°  
Shooting Position  
In other situations, the monitor can be stowed on  
the camera body by opening it outward and  
rotating it 180° left before folding it back onto the  
camera body. This position is recommended for  
most shooting and playback.  
Storage Position  
To protect the monitor when the camera is not in  
use, fold it back onto the camera body as shown at  
right.  
D Using the Monitor  
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown above. Do not use force. Failure to observe  
these precautions could damage the connection between the monitor and the camera  
body.  
Adjust the monitor before mounting the camera on a tripod.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Information Display  
Shooting information, including shutter speed, aperture, and  
the number of exposures remaining, is displayed in the monitor  
when the R button is pressed.  
R button  
Camera rotated 90° to shoot  
X
Camera in normal orientation  
in tall (portrait) orientation  
34 33 32 31 30 29 28  
1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28  
1
3
6
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
7
16  
17  
13  
15  
14  
19  
18  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10  
11  
12  
27  
26  
25  
24  
8
Set  
P
9
10 11  
12 13 14 15 16 17  
9
Set  
P
23 22 20 21  
1 Shooting mode  
11 Flash mode..............................71 27 Image quality......................... 62  
12 Exposure compensation......90 28 Battery indicator.................... 28  
13 ADL bracketing ....................103 29 “Beep” indicator ..................158  
14 Flash compensation..............92 30 Auto ISO sensitivity  
i auto/  
j auto (flash off) .............. 28  
Scene modes ...................... 33  
P, S, A, and M modes........... 80  
2 Aperture (f-number) ......83, 84  
3 Shutter speed ..................82, 84  
4 Shutter-speed display.............9  
5 Aperture display.......................9  
6 Exposure/white balance  
bracketing indicator........ 103  
7 Exposure indicator................ 85  
Exposure compensation  
indicator............................... 91  
Bracketing progress indicator  
.............................................. 105  
8 Auto-area AF indicator ........ 57  
3D-tracking indicator........... 57  
Focus point............................. 58  
9 Help indicator ...................... 221  
10 ADL bracketing indicator .... 105  
indicator.............................149  
31 Manual flash indicator .......162  
Flash compensation indicator  
for optional flash units ...200  
32 Date imprint indicator .......160  
33 GPS connection  
15 Picture Control .....................106  
16 Number of exposures  
remaining ............................29  
Capture mode indicator.....134  
17 “K” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures)............................29  
indicator.............................114  
18 Bracketing increment.........104 34 Eye-Fi connection  
indicator.............................173  
19 Active D-Lighting ...................94  
20 Metering ..................................88  
21 AF-area mode.........................56  
22 Focus mode.............................54  
23 Release mode.........................65  
24 ISO sensitivity .........................74  
25 White balance ........................96  
26 Image size ...............................64  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Settings in the Information Display  
To change settings for the items listed in the  
information display, press the P button.  
Highlight items using the multi selector and press  
J to view options for the highlighted item. Some  
items can also be adjusted using the command  
dial and camera buttons (0 10).  
P button  
X
A The Shutter-Speed and Aperture Displays  
These displays provide visual indications of shutter speed and aperture.  
Fast shutter speed, large  
aperture (small f-number).  
Slow shutter speed, small  
aperture (large f-number).  
While the mode dial is rotated, this display is replaced by an image of the mode dial.  
A Turning the Monitor Off  
To clear information from the display, press the R button again. Note that the monitor turns  
off automatically while the shutter-release is pressed or if no operations are performed for  
8 s (the default value). The information display can be restored by pressing the R button.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom Setting c2 (Auto  
off timers, 0 157). For information on choosing a design for the information display, see  
Info display format, (0 166). For information on choosing whether information is  
displayed when the shutter-release button is pressed; see Auto information display  
(0 168). For information on choosing whether the cursor in the information display “wraps  
around,” see Info wrap-around (0 168).  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Command Dial  
The command dial can be used with other controls to adjust a variety of settings  
when shooting information is displayed in the monitor.  
M button: flash mode and flash compensation  
E button:  
aperture,  
exposure  
compensation,  
X
and flash  
compensation  
Fn (E) button: release mode,  
image quality and size,  
ISO sensitivity,  
white balance,  
Active D-Lighting,  
or bracketing  
Mode dial  
Command dial  
Choose a scene (h mode;  
0 34).  
h mode  
Command dial  
Command dial  
Command dial  
Command dial  
Information display  
Information display  
Information display  
Information display  
Choose a combination of  
aperture and shutter speed  
(mode P; 0 81).  
Mode P  
Choose a shutter speed  
(mode S or M; 0 82, 84).  
Mode S or M  
Choose an aperture  
(mode A; 0 83).  
Mode A  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choose an  
aperture  
(mode M;  
0 84).  
+
+
+
Mode M  
E button  
E button  
M button  
Command dial  
Command dial  
Command dial  
Information display  
Information display  
Information display  
Set exposure  
compensation  
(mode P, S, or A;  
0 90).  
X
Mode P, S, or A  
Choose a flash mode (0 71).  
Adjust flash compensation (mode P, S, A, or M; 0 92).  
+
+
P, S, A, or M  
M button  
E button  
Command dial  
Information display  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The role of the Fn (E) button can be selected using  
Custom Setting f1 (Assign E/Fn button; 0 163),  
allowing the following settings to be adjusted by  
pressing the Fn (E) button and rotating the command  
dial:  
+
Fn (E) button  
Command dial  
Release mode (0 65)  
ISO sensitivity (0 74)  
Active D-Lighting (0 94)  
Image quality and size  
(0 62)  
X
White balance (0 96)  
Bracketing (0 103)  
The Power Switch  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera  
on.  
Power switch  
Power switch  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera  
off.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera Menus  
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can  
be accessed from the camera menus. To view the  
menus, press the G button.  
G button  
X
Tabs  
Choose from the following menus:  
D: Playback (0 146)  
C: Shooting (0 148)  
A: Custom Settings (0 153)  
B: Setup (0 165)  
N: Retouch (0 174)  
m: Recent settings or My Menu (defaults to  
Recent settings; 0 190)  
Slider shows position in current menu.  
Current settings are shown by icons.  
Menu options  
Options in current menu.  
d
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the  
monitor, help can be displayed by pressing the Qbutton.  
A description of the currently selected option or menu  
will be displayed while the button is pressed. Press 1 or  
3 to scroll through the display.  
Q button  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Camera Menus  
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.  
Move cursor up  
J button: select highlighted item  
Select highlighted item or  
Cancel and return to  
previous menu  
display sub-menu  
X
Move cursor down  
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.  
1 Display the menus.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
G button  
2 Highlight the icon for the current menu.  
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current  
menu.  
3 Select a menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to position the cursor in the  
selected menu.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Position the cursor in the selected menu.  
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected  
menu.  
5 Highlight a menu item.  
X
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.  
6 Display options.  
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu  
item.  
7 Highlight an option.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.  
8 Select the highlighted item.  
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit  
without making a selection, press the G  
button.  
Note the following:  
Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.  
While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some  
cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J.  
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway (0 32).  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Steps  
Charge the Battery  
The camera is powered by an EN-EL9a rechargeable Li-ion battery (supplied). To  
maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-23 quick charger  
before use. About one hour and forty minutes are required to fully recharge the  
battery when no charge remains.  
X
1 Plug the charger in.  
Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery  
charger and plug the power cable into an  
electrical outlet.  
2 Remove the terminal cover.  
Remove the terminal cover from the battery.  
h
h
A
W
1 0 8 0 m  
E L  
7 . 8  
a
L 9  
- E  
. 2 V  
7
Terminal  
cover  
3 Insert the battery.  
7 . 8 W h  
7 . 2 V 1 0 8 0 m A h  
E L - E L 9 a  
Insert the battery as shown in the illustration on  
the charger. The CHARGE lamp will blink while the  
battery charges.  
Battery Charging  
charging complete  
4 Remove the battery when charging is  
complete.  
7 . 8 W h  
7 . 2 V 1 0 8 0 m A h  
E L - E L 9 a  
Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp  
stops blinking. Remove the battery and unplug  
the charger.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insert the Battery  
Power switch  
1 Turn the camera off.  
A Inserting and Removing Batteries  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or  
removing batteries.  
X
2 Open the battery-chamber cover.  
Unlatch (q) and open (w) the battery-chamber  
cover.  
w
q
3 Insert the battery.  
Insert the battery as shown at right.  
4 Close the battery-chamber cover.  
D The Battery and Charger  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xii–xiii and 210–211 of this manual. Do  
not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F).  
Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures between 5–35°C (41–95°F); for best  
results, charge the battery at temperatures above 20°C (68°F). Battery capacity may  
temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature  
below the temperature at which it was charged.  
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to cool before recharging.  
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attach a Lens  
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is  
removed. An AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens is used in this manual for  
illustrative purposes.  
Focal length index  
Focal length scale  
Lens cap  
Mounting index  
X
CPU contacts (0 194)  
Rear lens cap  
A-M mode switch (see below)  
Focus ring (0 60, 229)  
VR (vibration reduction) switch (0 19)  
Zoom ring  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Remove the rear lens cap and the  
camera body cap.  
3 Attach the lens.  
Keeping the mounting index on the  
lens aligned with the mounting index  
on the camera body, position the lens  
in the camera’s bayonet mount (q).  
Being careful not to press the lens-  
release button, rotate the lens  
counter-clockwise until it clicks into  
place (w).  
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or  
M/A-M switch, select A (autofocus) or  
M/A (autofocus with manual priority).  
D Autofocus  
Autofocus is supported with only AF-S and AF-I lenses, which are equipped with autofocus  
motors. Autofocus is not available with other AF lenses.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses.  
To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button (q)  
while turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing the lens,  
replace the lens caps and camera body cap.  
Vibration Reduction (VR)  
X
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lenses support vibration reduction (VR),  
which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned,  
allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV at a focal length of  
55mm (Nikon measurements; effects vary with the user and shooting conditions).  
To use vibration reduction, slide the VR switch to ON. Vibration  
reduction is activated when the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera shake on the  
image in the viewfinder and simplifying the process of framing  
the subject and focusing in both autofocus and manual modes.  
When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to  
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned  
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied  
only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera  
smoothly in a wide arc.  
Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the VR switch to OFF. Turn vibration  
reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the  
tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod.  
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings  
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 194), lock aperture at the  
minimum setting (highest f-number).  
D Vibration Reduction  
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power  
to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not  
a malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.  
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction  
is active, the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released. This does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
A language-selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on.  
Choose a language and set the time and date. Photographs can not be taken until  
you have set the time and date.  
Power switch  
1 Turn the camera on.  
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.  
X
2 Select a language.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language  
and press J.  
3 Choose a time zone.  
A time-zone selection dialog will be displayed.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the local time zone (the  
UTC field shows the difference between the  
selected time zone and Coordinated Universal  
Time, or UTC, in hours) and press J.  
4 Choose a date format.  
Press 1 or 3 to choose the order in which the  
year, month, and day will be displayed. Press J  
to proceed to the next step.  
5 Turn daylight saving time on or off.  
Daylight saving time options will be displayed.  
Daylight saving time is off by default; if daylight  
saving time is in effect in the local time zone,  
press 1 to highlight On and press J.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Set the date and time.  
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.  
Press 4 or 2 to select an item, 1 or 3 to change.  
Press J to set the clock and exit to shooting  
mode.  
A The Setup Menu  
X
Language and date/time settings can be changed at any time using the Language (0 169)  
and Time zone and date (0 169) options in the setup menu.  
A The Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is  
charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an  
optional EP-5 power connector and EH-5a AC adapter (0 204). Three days of charging will  
power the clock for about a month. If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed  
when the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset.  
Set the clock to the correct time and date.  
A The Camera Clock  
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock  
regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insert a Memory Card  
The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (available separately).  
Power switch  
1 Turn the camera off.  
A Inserting and Removing Memory Cards  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or  
removing memory cards.  
X
2 Open the card slot cover.  
Slide the card slot cover out (q) and open the  
card slot (w).  
3 Insert the memory card.  
Holding the memory card as shown at right, slide  
it in until it clicks into place. The memory card  
GB  
4.0  
access lamp will light for a few seconds. Close  
the memory card slot cover.  
Front  
D Inserting Memory Cards  
Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards  
could damage the camera or the card. Check to be  
sure the card is in the correct orientation.  
Access lamp  
If this is the first time the memory card will be used in the camera after being  
used or formatted in another device, format the card as described on page 23.  
Removing Memory Cards  
After confirming that the access lamp is off, turn the  
camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and  
press the card in to eject it (q). The card can then be  
GB  
4.0  
removed by hand (w).  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Format the Memory Card  
Memory cards must be formatted after being used or formatted in other devices.  
Format the card as described below.  
D Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any  
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (0 134).  
X
Power switch  
1 Turn the camera on.  
2 Display format options.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Format memory card in the setup  
menu and press 2. For more information on  
using the menus, see page 13.  
G button  
3 Highlight Yes.  
To exit without formatting the memory card,  
highlight No and press J.  
4 Press J.  
The message at right will be displayed while  
the card is formatted. Do not remove the  
memory card or remove or disconnect the  
power source until formatting is complete.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Memory Cards  
Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards  
from the camera.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory  
cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source  
during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.  
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the  
camera or card.  
Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage  
the card.  
X
Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
A The Write Protect Switch  
Memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to  
prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the  
G B  
4 . 0  
“lock” position, photos can not be recorded or deleted and  
the memory card can not be formatted. To unlock the  
memory card, slide the switch to the “write” position.  
Write-protect switch  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus  
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual  
differences in vision. Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before  
framing pictures in the viewfinder.  
Power switch  
1 Remove the lens cap and turn the camera  
on.  
X
2 Focus the viewfinder.  
Slide the diopter adjustment control up and  
down until the viewfinder display and focus  
point are in sharp focus. When operating the  
control with your eye to the viewfinder, be  
careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in  
your eye.  
Focus point  
A Adjusting Viewfinder Focus  
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select single-servo autofocus  
(AF-S; 0 54), single-point AF (c; 0 57), and the center focus point (0 58), and then frame  
a high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button  
halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control  
to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be  
further adjusted using optional corrective lenses (0 202).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Photography and Playback  
s
This chapter outlines the basics of taking and viewing photographs in auto and scene  
modes.  
s
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes)............................................... 28  
Step 1: Turn the Camera On .................................................................................................... 28  
Step 2: Select i or j Mode.................................................................................................... 30  
Step 3: Frame the Photograph ............................................................................................... 30  
Step 4: Focus................................................................................................................................. 31  
Step 5: Shoot................................................................................................................................. 32  
Creative Photography (Scene Modes)....................................................................... 33  
k Portrait ....................................................................................................................................... 34  
l Landscape ................................................................................................................................ 34  
p Child ........................................................................................................................................... 34  
m Sports ......................................................................................................................................... 34  
n Close Up .................................................................................................................................... 35  
o Night Portrait........................................................................................................................... 35  
r Night Landscape .................................................................................................................... 35  
s Party/Indoor............................................................................................................................. 35  
t Beach/Snow............................................................................................................................. 36  
u Sunset......................................................................................................................................... 36  
v Dusk/Dawn............................................................................................................................... 36  
w Pet Portrait ............................................................................................................................... 36  
x Candlelight................................................................................................................................. 37  
y Blossom ..................................................................................................................................... 37  
z Autumn Colors ........................................................................................................................ 37  
0 Food............................................................................................................................................. 37  
1 Silhouette.................................................................................................................................. 38  
2 High Key.................................................................................................................................... 38  
3 Low Key ..................................................................................................................................... 38  
Basic Playback................................................................................................................ 39  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs......................................................................................... 40  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography  
(i and j Modes)  
This section describes how to take photographs in i (auto) mode, an  
automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings  
are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions, and  
in which the flash will fire automatically if the subject is poorly lit. To  
take photographs with the flash off while leaving the camera in  
control of other settings, rotate the mode dial to j to select auto (flash off) mode.  
s
Step 1: Turn the Camera On  
Power switch  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.  
After a brief pause while the camera cleans the  
image sensor, the information display will  
appear in the monitor.  
2 Check the battery level.  
Check the battery level in the information  
display or the viewfinder (if the monitor is off,  
press the R button to view the information  
display; if the monitor does not turn on, the  
battery is exhausted and must be recharged).  
Information display Viewfinder  
Description  
L
Battery fully charged.  
Battery partially discharged.  
K
Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare battery or  
prepare to charge battery.  
H
d
H
(blinks)  
d
Battery exhausted; shutter release disabled. Charge or  
(blinks) exchange battery.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Check the number of exposures  
remaining.  
The information display and viewfinder show the  
number of photographs that can be stored on  
the memory card. Check the number of  
exposures remaining.  
If there is not enough memory to store  
additional photographs at current settings, a  
warning will be displayed. No further pictures  
can be taken until the memory card has been  
replaced (0 22) or photographs have been  
deleted (0 40, 126).  
s
When enough memory remains on the memory  
card to record a thousand or more pictures at  
current settings, the number of exposures  
remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded  
down to the nearest hundred (e.g., if there is  
room for 1,260 exposures, the exposure count  
display will show 1.2 K).  
A Auto Meter Off  
At default settings, the viewfinder and information display will turn off if no operations are  
performed for about eight seconds (auto meter off), reducing the drain on the battery. Press  
the shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display (0 32).  
8 s  
Exposure meters on  
Exposure meters off  
Exposure meters on  
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using  
Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 157).  
A Image Sensor Cleaning  
At default settings, the camera vibrates the low-pass filter covering the image sensor to  
remove dust when the camera is turned on or off.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 2: Select i or j Mode  
To shoot where use of a flash is prohibited,  
photograph infants, or capture natural lighting under  
low light conditions, rotate the mode dial to j.  
Otherwise, rotate the mode dial to i.  
Mode dial  
s
j mode  
i mode  
Step 3: Frame the Photograph  
1 Ready the camera.  
When framing photographs in the viewfinder,  
hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle  
the camera body or lens with your left. Keep  
your elbows propped lightly against your torso  
for support and place one foot half a pace ahead  
of the other to keep your upper body stable.  
Hold the camera as shown at right when framing  
photographs in portrait (tall) orientation.  
In j mode, shutter speeds slow when lighting is  
poor; use of a tripod is recommended.  
2 Frame the photograph.  
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the  
main subject in at least one of the 11 focus  
points.  
Focus point  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Using a Zoom Lens  
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a  
larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area  
visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths  
on the lens focal length scale index to zoom in, shorter focal  
lengths to zoom out).  
Zoom in  
Zoom ring  
Zoom out  
s
Step 4: Focus  
1 Press the shutter-release button halfway.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to  
focus. The camera will select the focus points  
automatically. If the subject is poorly lit, the flash  
may pop up and the AF-assist illuminator may  
light.  
2 Check the indicators in the viewfinder.  
When the focus operation is complete, the  
selected focus points will be briefly highlighted,  
a beep will sound, and the in-focus indicator (I)  
will appear in the viewfinder.  
In-focus indicator  
I
Description  
Subject in focus.  
Camera unable to focus using  
autofocus. See page 55.  
In-focus  
indicator  
Buffer  
capacity  
I (blinks)  
While the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway, the number of exposures that can be  
stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 66) will be  
displayed in the viewfinder.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5: Shoot  
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of  
the way down to release the shutter and record the  
photograph. The access lamp next to the memory  
card slot cover will light and the photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor for a few seconds (to resume  
shooting before the photograph clears from the  
display, press the shutter-release button halfway). Do  
not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the  
power source until the lamp has gone out and recording  
is complete.  
Access lamp  
s
A The Shutter-Release Button  
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button  
the rest of the way down.  
A The Built-in Flash  
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the  
built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway. If the flash is raised, photographs can only  
be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is displayed. If the flash-  
ready indicator is not displayed, the flash is charging; remove your  
finger briefly from the shutter-release button and try again.  
To save battery power when the flash is not in use, return it to its  
closed position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks  
into place.  
A Using the Flash  
For more information on using the flash, see page 70.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creative Photography (Scene Modes)  
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene  
mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene,  
making creative photography as simple as selecting a mode, framing  
a picture, and shooting as described on pages 28–32.  
The Mode Dial  
The following scenes can be selected with the mode  
dial:  
Mode dial  
Land-  
Portrait scape  
Night  
Sports Close up portrait scenes  
Other  
s
Child  
k
l
p
m
n
o h  
hMode  
When the mode dial is rotated to h, the following scenes can be selected by  
rotating the command dial until the desired scene is shown in the information  
display (0 8):  
Command dial  
Information display  
Mode dial  
Night  
landscape  
Party/indoor Beach/snow  
Sunset  
Dusk/dawn  
Pet portrait  
Candlelight  
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
Blossom  
Autumn colors  
Food  
Silhouette  
High key  
Low key  
y
z
0
1
2
3
A h Mode  
The mode selected when the mode dial is rotated to h  
can also be chosen using the Scene mode option in the  
shooting menu (0 148).  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scene Modes  
kPortrait  
pChild  
s
Use for portraits with soft, natural-  
looking skin tones. If the subject is far  
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing  
and background details are vividly  
from the background or a telephoto lens rendered, while skin tones remain soft  
is used, background details will be  
softened to lend the composition a  
sense of depth.  
and natural.  
lLandscape  
mSports  
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight. Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for  
The built-in flash and AF-assist  
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
dynamic sports shots in which the main  
subject stands out clearly. The built-in  
flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
nClose Up  
rNight Landscape  
s
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, Reduce noise and unnatural colors when  
and other small objects (a macro lens can photographing night landscapes,  
be used to focus at very close ranges).  
Use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blur.  
including street lighting and neon signs.  
The built-in flash and AF-assist  
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur.  
oNight Portrait  
sParty/Indoor  
Use for a natural balance between the  
main subject and the background in  
Capture the effects of indoor  
background lighting. Use for parties and  
portraits taken under low light. Use of a other indoor scenes.  
tripod is recommended to prevent blur.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tBeach/Snow  
vDusk/Dawn  
s
Capture the brightness of sunlight  
expanses of water, snow, or sand. The  
built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator  
turn off.  
Preserves the colors seen in the weak  
natural light before dawn or after sunset.  
The built-in flash and AF-assist  
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
uSunset  
wPet Portrait  
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets Use for portraits of active pets. The AF-  
and sunrises. The built-in flash and AF-  
assist illuminator turn off; use of a tripod  
is recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
assist illuminator turns off.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xCandlelight  
zAutumn Colors  
s
For photographs taken by candlelight.  
Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in  
The built-in flash turns off; use of a tripod autumn leaves. The built-in flash turns  
is recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
off; use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blur when lighting is poor.  
yBlossom  
0Food  
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in  
bloom, and other landscapes featuring  
Use for vivid photographs of food. Use of  
a tripod is recommended to prevent blur  
expanses of blossoms. The built-in flash when lighting is poor; the flash can also  
turns off; use of a tripod is  
recommended to prevent blur when  
lighting is poor.  
be used (0 70).  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1Silhouette  
3Low Key  
s
Silhouette subjects against bright  
Use to create dark, somber images that  
backgrounds. The built-in flash turns off; bring out highlights when shooting dark  
use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blur when lighting is poor.  
scenes. The built-in flash turns off; use of  
a tripod is recommended to prevent blur  
when lighting is poor.  
2High Key  
Use to create bright images that seem  
filled with light when shooting bright  
scenes. The built-in flash turns off.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Playback  
At default settings, photographs are automatically displayed for about 4 s after  
shooting. If no photograph is displayed in the monitor, the most recent picture can  
be viewed by pressing the K button.  
1 Press the K button.  
A photograph will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
s
K button  
2 View additional pictures.  
Additional pictures can be displayed by  
pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the command  
dial.  
To view additional information on the  
current photograph, press 1 and 3 (0 117).  
1/ 12  
NIKON D5000  
1
250 F11  
200  
35mm  
AUTO 0,  
0
_
100D5000  
D
S
C
0001. JPG  
:
15 04/2009 10 02 27  
NOR AL  
4288x2M848  
:
/
To end playback and return to shooting  
mode, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs  
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press the O button.  
Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted.  
1 Display the photograph.  
Display the photograph you wish to delete  
as described on the preceding page.  
s
2 Delete the photograph.  
Press the O button. A confirmation dialog  
will be displayed; press the O button again to  
delete the image and return to playback (to  
exit without deleting the picture, press K).  
O button  
A Delete  
To delete selected images (0 127), all images taken on a selected date (0 128), or all images  
in the current playback folder (0 146), use the Delete option in the playback menu.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Framing Pictures in the Monitor  
x
(Live View)  
This chapter describes how to frame pictures in the monitor using live view.  
x
Framing Photographs in the Monitor........................................................................ 42  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor  
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.  
1 Press the a button.  
The mirror will be raised and the view  
through the lens will be displayed in the  
camera monitor. The subject will no longer  
be visible in the viewfinder.  
a button  
x
Item  
Description  
0
30, 33,  
80  
Shooting mode  
“No movie” icon  
Time remaining  
The mode currently selected with the mode dial.  
q
w
e
r
t
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
The amount of time remaining before live view ends  
automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.  
50  
46  
43  
43  
Live view autofocus The current autofocus mode.  
The current focus point. The display varies with the option  
selected for autofocus mode (0 43).  
Focus point  
Audio recording  
indicator  
Time remaining  
(movie mode)  
Indicates whether sound is being recorded with movies.  
51  
50  
y
u
The recording time remaining in movie mode.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Choose an autofocus mode.  
Press the P button and use the multi  
selector to highlight the current autofocus  
mode in the monitor. Press J to display the  
following options (the default option differs  
depending on the shooting mode; 0 78).  
Highlight an option and press J.  
P button  
Mode  
Description  
The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait  
subjects facing the camera. Use for portraits.  
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait  
subjects. Use the multi selector to select the focus point.  
Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod  
is recommended.  
8 Face priority  
9 Wide area  
x
! Normal area  
" Subject tracking Track a selected subject as it moves through the frame.  
A Live View Autofocus  
The autofocus mode for live view autofocus can  
also be chosen using Custom Settings a3 (Live  
view autofocus, 0 155).  
3 Choose the focus point.  
Face priority: A double yellow border will be  
displayed when the camera detects a portrait  
subject facing the camera (if multiple faces,  
Focus point  
up to a maximum of five, are detected, the  
camera will focus on the closest subject).  
Wide area and normal area: Use the multi  
selector to move the focus point to any point  
in the frame.  
Focus point  
Subject tracking: Frame the subject in the  
center of the monitor and press 1 to focus.  
When the camera focuses, the focus point  
will turn yellow and then start tracking the  
selected subject as it moves through the  
frame.  
Focus point  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Focus.  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.  
Face priority: The camera sets focus and exposure for the  
face in the double yellow border while the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway; if the camera can no longer  
detect the subject (because, for example, the subject has  
looked away), borders will no longer be displayed.  
Wide area and normal area: The camera focuses on the subject  
in the selected focus point while the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
x
Subject tracking: The camera focuses on the current subject.  
To end tracking, press 1.  
D Subject Tracking  
Some time may be required for the camera to initiate focus. The  
camera may be unable to track subjects if they are small, moving  
quickly, or a similar color to the background, or if both the subject  
and the background are very bright or very dark, the brightness  
and color of the subject or background varies greatly, or the  
subject visibly changes size.  
The focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten or darken while  
the camera focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be  
displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will blink  
red. Note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point blinks red.  
Check focus in the monitor before shooting.  
5 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down  
to shoot. The monitor will turn off. When shooting is  
complete, the photograph will be displayed in the monitor  
for 4 s or until the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. The camera will then return to live view mode.  
6 Exit live view mode.  
Press the a button to exit live view mode.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Live View Display Options  
Press the R button to cycle through display options as shown below. The options available  
depend on the setting selected for Custom Setting d7 (Live view display options; 0 161).  
Show indicators  
Hide indicators  
Framing grid  
Show shooting info  
A Positioning the Monitor  
The monitor can be adjusted for self-portraits or for low- or high-angle shots.  
x
Low-angle shots  
High-angle shots  
Self-portraits  
Frame shots with the camera  
close to the ground.  
Frame shots while holding  
the camera over your head.  
Monitor shows mirror image  
of what will appear in final  
picture.  
A Exposure Compensation  
In P, S, and A modes, exposure can be adjusted by 5 EV in increments of 1/3 EV (0 90). Note  
that the effects of values over +3 EV or under –3 EV can not be previewed in the monitor.  
A HDMI  
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the  
camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display  
the view through the lens as shown at right.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Shooting in Live View Mode  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure, remove the  
rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap before  
shooting.  
Although they will not appear in the final picture, banding or distortion may be visible in the  
monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned  
horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave  
after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots may also appear.  
When shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light  
sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal  
circuitry.  
Live view shooting ends automatically if the monitor is closed or the lens is removed.  
x
Live view mode can be used for up to an hour. Note, however, that  
when used in live view mode for extended periods, the temperature  
of the camera’s internal circuits may rise, resulting in image noise  
and unusual colors (the camera may also become noticeably warm,  
but this does not indicated a malfunction). To prevent damage to the camera’s internal  
circuits, live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats. A count-  
down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient  
temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.  
During live view, the camera displays the shutter speed and aperture in effect at the start of  
live view. Exposure is metered again when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way  
down.  
To reduce blur when using a tripod, choose On for Custom Setting d5 (Exposure delay  
mode).  
D Using Autofocus in Live View  
Autofocus is slower in live view. The camera may be unable to focus in the following  
situations:  
The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame  
The subject lacks contrast  
The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the  
subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in  
brightness  
A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used  
The subject appears smaller than the focus point  
The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., windows in a skyscraper)  
The subject is moving  
Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable  
to focus.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Manual Focus  
To focus in manual focus mode (0 60), rotate the  
lens focus ring until the subject is in focus.  
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 6.7 ×  
for precise focus, press the X button. While the view  
through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window  
will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner  
of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to  
areas of the frame not visible in the monitor  
(available only if Wide area or Normal area is  
selected for Live view autofocus), or press W to  
zoom out.  
x
X button  
Navigation window  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
y
This chapter describes how to record movies in live view.  
Recording Movies.......................................................................................................... 50  
Viewing Movies.............................................................................................................. 52  
y
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded at 24 fps in live view mode.  
1 Press the a button.  
The mirror is raised and the view through the  
lens is displayed in the monitor instead of the  
viewfinder.  
D The 0 Icon  
A 0 icon (0 42) indicates that movies can not be  
a button  
recorded.  
A Modes A and M  
Set aperture before recording in mode A or M.  
y
2 Focus.  
Frame the opening shot and press the shutter-release button  
halfway. Shooting can not begin until the camera has focused.  
Autofocus is not available after recording begins; use manual focus to  
focus (0 60) during recording.  
Recording indicator  
3 Start recording.  
Press J to start recording (at default settings,  
both video and sound are recorded; do not cover  
the microphone on the front of the camera  
during recording). A recording indicator and the  
time available are displayed in the monitor.  
Exposure can be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L  
button (0 89) or (in P, S, and A) altered by up to  
3 EV in steps of 1/3 EV using exposure compensation (0 90).  
Time remaining  
4 End recording.  
Press J again to end recording (to end  
recording and take a still picture in the mode  
currently selected with the mode dial, press the  
shutter-release button all the way down). Recording will end automatically  
when the maximum size is reached or the memory card is full.  
A Maximum Size  
Each movie file can be up to 2 GB in size. The maximum length is 5 min for movies with  
a frame size of 1280 × 720, 20 min for other movies; note that depending on memory  
card write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Movie Settings  
To choose movie frame size and sound options:  
1 Select Movie settings.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Movie settings in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Choose frame size and sound  
recording options.  
To choose a frame size, highlight Quality  
and press 2. Highlight one of the following  
options and press J to select:  
y
Option  
Frame size (pixels)  
1280 × 720  
640 × 424  
Maximum length  
3
4
5
1280×720 (16:9)  
640×424 (3:2)  
320×216 (3:2)  
5 min.  
20 min.  
320 × 216  
To turn sound recording on or off, highlight Sound and press 2. To record  
monaural sound with movies, highlight On and press J. Select Off to record  
silent movies.  
D Recording Movies  
Banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent,  
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves  
at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave after-images when the camera  
is panned. Jagged edges, false colors, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. When  
recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure  
to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed. Unless the camera is connected to a TV,  
recording will also end if the monitor is closed.  
When used in live view or movie-recording mode for extended  
periods, the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise,  
resulting in image noise and unusual colors (the camera may also  
become noticeably warm, but this does not indicated a malfunction). To prevent damage to  
the camera’s internal circuits, recording will end automatically before the camera overheats.  
A count-down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient  
temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.  
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.  
The camera may record the sound made by VR lenses when vibration reduction is on.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Movies  
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 116). The following  
operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:  
1 icon  
Recording time  
Audio indicator  
To  
Use  
Description  
Start/pause/  
resume  
J
Press J to start, pause, or resume playback.  
y
Advance/  
rewind  
Press 4 or 2 to rewind or fast forward. While playback is  
paused, press 4 or 2 to rewind or advance one frame.  
Adjust volume  
X/ W  
Press X to increase volume, W to decrease.  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.  
See page 145 for more information.  
Exittoshooting  
mode  
Display menus  
G
Return to full-  
frame playback  
/K Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More on Photography (All Modes)  
z
This and the following two chapters build on the Tutorial to cover more advanced  
shooting and playback options.  
Focus................................................................................................................................ 54  
Focus Mode................................................................................................................................... 54  
AF-Area Mode .............................................................................................................................. 56  
Focus Point Selection ................................................................................................................ 58  
Focus Lock ..................................................................................................................................... 58  
Manual Focus................................................................................................................................ 60 z  
Image Quality and Size................................................................................................. 62  
Image Quality............................................................................................................................... 62  
Image Size...................................................................................................................................... 64  
Release Mode ................................................................................................................. 65  
Self-Timer and Remote Modes............................................................................................... 67  
Using the Built-in Flash ................................................................................................ 70  
Flash Mode .................................................................................................................................... 71  
ISO Sensitivity ................................................................................................................ 74  
Interval Timer Photography........................................................................................ 76  
Two-Button Reset .......................................................................................................... 78  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus  
Focus can be adjusted automatically or manually (see “Focus Mode,below). The user  
can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 60) or use focus lock  
to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (0 58).  
Focus Mode  
Choose from automatic and manual focus modes.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
z
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display focus-mode options.  
Highlight the current focus mode in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a focus mode.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J. Note that AF-S and AF-C are available only in  
modes P, S, A, and M.  
Option  
Auto-servo  
AF  
Description  
Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus if subject is  
stationary, continuous-servo autofocus if subject is moving.  
AF-A  
AF-S  
AF-C  
Single-servo For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button  
AF is pressed halfway.  
Continuous- For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-  
servo AF release button is pressed halfway.  
MF Manual focus Focus manually (0 60).  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Continuous-servo Autofocus  
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera gives  
priority to shutter response and the shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator is  
displayed.  
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may  
be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator  
(I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released  
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually (0 60) or use focus lock  
(0 58) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the  
photograph.  
There is little or no  
contrast between the  
subject and the  
background.  
The focus point contains  
areas of sharply  
contrasting brightness.  
Example: Subject is the  
same color as the  
background.  
Example: Subject is half in  
the shade.  
z
The focus point contains  
objects at different  
distances from the  
camera.  
Background objects  
appear larger than the  
subject.  
Example: a building is in  
the frame behind the  
subject.  
Example: Subject is inside  
a cage.  
The subject contains many  
fine details.  
The subject is dominated  
by regular geometric  
patterns.  
Example: A field of flowers  
or other subjects that are  
small or lack variation in  
brightness.  
Example: A row of  
windows in a skyscraper.  
D The AF-Assist Illuminator  
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light  
automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. The AF-assist illuminator will not  
light during continuous-servo autofocus or manual focus, in  
shooting modes in which the AF-assist illuminator can not be used,  
or if Off has been selected for Custom Setting a2 (Built-in AF-assist  
illuminator; 0 155). The illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0  
m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with  
a focal length of 18–200 mm and remove the lens hood.  
AF-assist illuminator  
A The Beep Speaker  
Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 158) can be used to turn the beep speaker on or off.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AF-Area Mode  
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display AF-area mode options.  
Highlight the current AF-area mode in the  
z
information display and press J.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Choose an AF-area mode.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J.  
Option  
Description  
User selects focus point using multi selector (0 58); camera focuses  
on subject in selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects.  
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus point manually (0 58),  
but camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus  
points if subject briefly leaves selected point. Use with erratically  
moving subjects. In AF-S focus mode, user selects focus point manually  
(0 58); camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only.  
Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point.  
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus point using multi selector  
(0 58). If subject moves after camera has focused, camera uses 3D-  
tracking to select new focus point and keep focus locked on original  
c Single point  
Dynamic  
d
area  
e Auto-area  
z
3D-tracking subject while shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If subject  
(11 points) leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from shutter-release button  
and recompose photograph with subject in selected focus point. In  
AF-S focus mode, user selects focus point manually (0 58); camera  
focuses on subject in selected focus point only.  
f
A AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode can also be selected from the Custom Settings menu  
(0 155). AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other  
than P, S, A, or M are reset when another shooting mode is selected.  
A 3D-tracking (11 Points)  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the  
focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the  
desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus Point Selection  
In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AF-area modes other  
than e Auto-area, you can choose from 11 focus points, making it possible to  
compose photographs with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.  
1 Choose an AF-area mode other than  
e Auto area (0 56).  
2 Select the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to select the focus point in  
the viewfinder or information display. Press J to  
select the center focus area.  
z
Focus point  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing in AF-A, AF-S, and  
AF-C focus modes (0 54), making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in  
a focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus using  
autofocus (0 55), you can also focus on another subject at the same distance and  
then use focus lock to recompose the photograph. Focus lock is most effective when  
an option other than e Auto-area is selected for AF-area mode (0 56).  
1 Focus.  
Position the subject in the selected focus point  
and press the shutter-release button halfway to  
initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator  
(I) appears in the viewfinder.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Lock focus.  
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the shutter-release  
button pressed halfway (q), press the AE-L/AF-L  
button (w) to lock both focus and exposure (an  
AE-L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder).  
Focus will remain locked while the AE-L/AF-L  
button is pressed, even if you later remove your  
finger from the shutter-release button.  
Shutter-release button  
AE-L/AF-L button  
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indicator  
appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter-  
release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (see  
above).  
z
3 Recompose the photograph and shoot.  
Focus will remain locked between shots if you  
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
(AF-S) or keep the AE-L/AF-L button pressed,  
allowing several photographs in succession to  
be taken at the same focus setting.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is  
in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.  
A The AE-L/AF-L Button  
Custom Setting f2 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button; 0 164) controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L  
button.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Focus  
Manual focus can be used when you are not using an AF-S or AF-I lens or when  
autofocus does not produce the desired results (0 55).  
M/A-M  
switch  
1 Set the lens focus-mode switch.  
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M switch,  
slide the switch to M.  
A-M switch  
2 Focus.  
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the  
image displayed on the clear matte field in the  
viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at  
any time, even when the image is not in focus.  
z
A AF-S Lenses  
Users of AF-S lenses (including the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens used in this  
manual for illustrative purposes; 0 229) can select manual focus simply by setting the lens  
focus-mode switch to M.  
A M/A  
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with manual override, MF priority), manual focus can also  
be selected by setting the camera focus mode to MF (manual focus; 0 54). Focus can then  
be adjusted manually, regardless of the mode selected with the lens.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Electronic Rangefinder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the  
viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether  
the subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus  
point can be selected from any of the 11 focus points).  
After positioning the subject in the selected focus point,  
press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate the  
lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.  
Note that with the subjects listed on page 55, the in-focus  
indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is  
not in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before  
shooting.  
A Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between your subject and the camera,  
measure from the focal plane mark on the camera body. The  
distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane  
is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).  
46.5mm  
z
Focal plane mark  
A The Exposure Indicator  
If desired, the exposure indicator can be used to determine whether the focus point for  
manual focus is in front of or behind the subject (0 156).  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Quality and Size  
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph  
occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger  
sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored  
on the memory card (0 215).  
Image Quality  
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
z
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display image quality options.  
Highlight the current image quality in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a file type.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J.  
Option  
File type  
Description  
Raw 12-bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the  
NEF memory card. Choose for images that will be processed on a  
computer.  
NEF (RAW)  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine  
image quality).  
JPEG fine  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal  
image quality).  
JPEG normal JPEG  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic  
image quality).  
JPEG basic  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG fine  
File type  
Description  
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-  
quality JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW) + NEF/ Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-  
JPEG normal JPEG quality JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG basic  
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-  
quality JPEG image.  
A NEF (RAW) Images  
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.  
White balance bracketing (0 103) and date imprint (0 160) are not available at image  
quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.  
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2  
(available separately; 0 202) or ViewNX (available on the supplied Software Suite CD). JPEG  
copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0 184).  
A NEF (RAW)/NEF+JPEG  
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine, NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal, or NEF  
(RAW) + JPEG basic are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When  
photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.  
z
A File Names  
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn  
is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by  
the camera, and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF images,  
“JPG” for JPEG images, or “AVI” for movies. The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of  
“NEF+JPEG” have the same file names but different extensions. Small copies created with  
the small picture option in the retouch menu have file names beginning with “SSC_” and  
ending with the extension .JPG” (e.g., “SSC_0001.JPG”). Stop motion movies have file names  
beginning with “ASC_” (e.g., “ASC_0001.AVI”); images recorded with the other options in the  
retouch menu have file names beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001. JPG”). Images  
recorded with the Color space option in the shooting menu set to Adobe RGB (0 150) have  
names that begin with an underscore (e.g., “_DSC0001.JPG”).  
A The Shooting Menu  
Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option  
in the shooting menu (0 148).  
A The Fn Button  
Image quality and size can also be adjusted by pressing the Fn (E) button and rotating the  
command dial (0 163).  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Size  
Image size is measured in pixels.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display image size options.  
Highlight the current image size in the  
information display and press J.  
z
3 Choose an image size.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J.  
Image size  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Size (pixels)  
Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi  
54.5 × 36.2 cm (21.4 × 14.2 in.)  
40.8 × 27.1 cm (16.1 × 10.7 in.)  
27.2 × 18.1 cm (10.7 × 7.1 in.)  
4,288 × 2,848  
3,216 × 2,136  
2,144 × 1,424  
A The Shooting Menu  
Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the  
shooting menu (0 148).  
A The Fn Button  
Image quality and size can also be adjusted by pressing the Fn (E) button and rotating the  
command dial (0 163).  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Release Mode  
Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a time, in a  
continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay or remote control, or with  
reduced camera noise.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display release mode options.  
Highlight the current release mode in the  
information display and press J.  
z
3 Choose a release mode.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J.  
Mode  
Description  
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is  
pressed.  
Camera records about 4 frames per second while shutter-release  
button is held down.  
Use for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake  
(0 67).  
8
I
E
Single frame  
Continuous  
Self-timer  
Optional ML-L3 wireless remote control required. Shutter is  
released after two-second delay (0 67).  
" Delayed remote  
Quick-response Optional ML-L3 wireless remote control required. Shutter is  
#
remote  
released immediately (0 67).  
As for 8 (single frame) except that camera makes no sound until  
Quiet shutter- finger is removed from shutter-release button after shooting and  
v
release  
beep does not sound when camera focuses, keeping noise to a  
minimum in quiet surroundings.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to  
continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs  
can be taken in succession; note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the  
memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of the images in the buffer,  
recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or  
remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is  
switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in the  
buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the  
shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.  
A Continuous Release Mode  
Continuous release mode (I) can not be used with the built-in flash; rotate the mode dial to  
j (0 30) or turn the flash off (0 70–71).  
A Buffer Size  
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the  
memory buffer at current settings is shown in the viewfinder  
exposure-count display while the shutter-release button is pressed. The illustration shows  
the display when space remains in the buffer for about 21 pictures.  
z
A Auto Image Rotation  
The camera orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all images in the same burst,  
even if the camera is rotated during shooting. See “Auto Image Rotation” (0 170).  
A See Also  
For information on using the Fn (E) button and the command dial to select a release mode,  
see page 163. For information on the number of photographs that can be taken in a single  
burst, see page 215.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-Timer and Remote Modes  
The self-timer and optional ML-L3 wireless remote control (0 203) can be used to  
reduce camera shake or for self-portraits.  
1 Mount the camera on a tripod.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.  
2 Select a release mode (0 65).  
Select self-timer (E), delayed remote  
("), or quick response release mode  
(#).  
3 Frame the photograph.  
A Using a Remote Control  
If autofocus is in effect in delayed remote or quick response release mode, the camera  
can be focused by pressing the shutter-release button halfway (the shutter will not be  
released if the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down).  
z
A Cover the Viewfinder.  
After framing the photograph, remove  
the rubber eyecup (q) and insert the  
supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap as shown  
(w). This prevents light entering via the  
viewfinder interfering with exposure.  
Hold the camera firmly when removing  
the eyepiece cup.  
DK-5 eyepiece cap  
q
w
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Take the photograph.  
Self-timer mode: Press the shutter-  
release button halfway to focus, and  
then press the button the rest of the  
way down to start the self-timer. The  
self-timer lamp will start to blink and a  
beep will begin to sound. Two  
seconds before the photograph is  
taken, the self-timer lamp will stop  
blinking and the beeping will become  
more rapid. The shutter will be  
released about ten seconds after the  
timer starts.  
The timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in  
which the shutter can not be released.  
Delayed remote and quick response modes:  
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft.) or less,  
aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at  
the infrared receiver on the camera  
and press the shutter-release button  
on the ML-L3. In delayed remote  
z
mode, the self-timer lamp will light for  
about two seconds before the shutter  
is released. In quick-response remote  
mode, the self-timer lamp will flash  
after the shutter has been released. No  
picture will be taken if the camera is  
unable to focus or in other situations  
in which the shutter can not be released.  
If no operations are performed for about a minute after selecting delayed  
remote or quick-response remote modes, the camera will automatically return  
to single frame, continuous, or quiet shutter-release mode, cancelling remote  
control mode.  
Turning the camera off cancels self-timer and remote release modes and restores  
single frame, continuous, or quiet shutter-release mode.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Before Using the Remote Control  
Before using the remote control for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery insulator  
sheet.  
D Using the Built-in Flash  
Before taking a photograph with the flash in P, S, A, M, or 0 modes, press the M button to raise  
the flash and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 70). Shooting will  
be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer or delayed remote timer has started.  
In auto or scene modes in which the flash pops up automatically, the flash will begin  
charging when delayed remote or quick-response remote mode is selected; once the flash is  
charged, it will automatically pop up and fire if required when the shutter-release button on  
the ML-L3 is pressed. The camera will only respond to the shutter-release button on the  
ML-L3 once the flash has charged. Only one photograph will be taken when the flash is used,  
regardless of the number of shots selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, 0 157).  
In flash modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction lamp will light for  
about one second before the shutter is released. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer  
lamp will light for two seconds, followed by the red-eye reduction lamp, which lights for one  
second before the shutter is released to reduce red-eye.  
z
A The E Button  
Self-timer mode can also be selected by pressing the  
E button (0 163).  
E button  
A See Also  
For information on changing the duration of the self-timer and choosing the number of  
shots taken, see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, 0 157). For information on choosing the  
length of time the camera will remain in standby mode before remote control mode is  
cancelled, see Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration, 0 157). For information on  
controlling the beeps that sound when the self-timer and remote control are used, see  
Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 158).  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Built-in Flash  
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit  
subjects.  
Using the Built-in Flash: i, k, p, n, o, s, and wModes  
1 Choose a flash mode (0 71).  
2 Take pictures.  
The flash will pop up as required when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and  
fire when a photograph is taken.  
Using the Built-in Flash: P, S, A, M, and 0Modes  
1 Raise the flash.  
z
Press the M button to raise the flash.  
2 Choose a flash mode (0 71).  
This step can be omitted when shooting in 0  
mode.  
M button  
3 Take pictures.  
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.  
Lowering the Built-in Flash  
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it  
gently downward until the latch clicks into place.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Mode  
To choose a flash mode:  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display flash mode options.  
Highlight the current flash mode in the  
information display and press J.  
z
3 Choose a flash mode.  
Highlight a flash mode and press J.  
i, k, p, n, s, w  
o
0
Auto+slow sync+  
red-eye reduction  
No Auto  
N
Fill flash  
NYr  
Auto+  
red-eye reduction  
NYo  
Nr Auto+slow sync  
Off  
j
Off  
j
P, A  
Fill flash  
S, M  
N
N
Fill flash  
Red-eye reduction  
NY  
Red-eye reduction  
NY  
NYp Slow sync+red-eye reduction  
Np Slow sync  
Nq Rear-curtain sync  
Nq* Rear curtain+slow sync  
* p appears in information display when setting is complete.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Flash Modes  
The flash modes listed on the previous page may combine one or more of the following  
settings, as shown by the flash mode icon:  
AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is back lit, flash pops up automatically  
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required.  
Y (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. Red-eye reduction lamp lights before flash fires,  
reducing “red-eye.”  
j (off): Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is back-lit.  
SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night  
or under low light. Use to include background lighting in portraits.  
REAR (rear-curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind  
moving light sources (below at right). If this icon is not displayed, flash will fire as the  
shutter opens (front-curtain sync; the effect this produces with moving light sources is  
shown below at left).  
z
Front-curtain sync  
Rear-curtain sync  
A Choosing a Flash Mode  
The flash mode can also be  
selected by pressing the M  
button and rotating the  
command dial (in P, S, A, and M  
modes, raise the flash before  
using the M button to choose  
the flash mode).  
+
M button  
Command  
dial  
Information display  
A The Built-in Flash  
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash, see page 196. Remove  
lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm (2 ft.) and can not  
be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses.  
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for  
several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.  
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash  
The following shutter speeds are available with the built-in flash when vibration reduction  
(VR) is not used.  
Mode  
i, k, p, s, w, P, A  
Shutter speed  
1/2001/60 s  
1/2001/125 s  
1/200–1 s  
Mode  
S
M
Shutter speed  
1/200–30 s  
1/200–30 s, bulb  
n, 0  
o
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range  
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.  
Aperture at ISO equivalent of  
Range  
200  
1.4  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
400  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
800  
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
1600  
4
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
3200  
5.6  
8
11  
16  
22  
32  
m
ft.  
1.0–12  
0.7–8.5  
0.6–6.1  
0.6–4.2  
0.6–3.0  
0.6–2.1  
0.6–1.5  
0.6–1.1  
0.6–0.8  
3ft. 3in.–39ft. 4in.  
2ft. 4in.–27ft. 11in.  
2ft.–20ft.  
2ft.–13ft. 9in.  
2ft.–9ft. 10in.  
2ft.–6ft. 11in.  
2ft.–4ft. 11in.  
2ft.–3ft. 7in.  
2ft.–2ft. 7in.  
z
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ISO Sensitivity  
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the ISO sensitivity,  
the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller  
apertures.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display ISO sensitivity options.  
z
Highlight the current ISO sensitivity in the  
information display and press J.  
3 Choose an ISO sensitivity.  
Highlight an option and press J. ISO sensitivity  
can be set between values roughly equivalent to  
ISO 200 and ISO 3200 in steps equivalent to  
1/3 EV. For special situations, ISO sensitivity can  
be lowered below ISO 200 by about 0.3 EV  
(Lo 0.3, equivalent to ISO 160), 0.7 EV (Lo 0.7, equivalent to ISO 125), or 1.0 EV  
(Lo 1, equivalent to ISO 100), or raised above ISO 3200 by about 0.3 EV (Hi 0.3,  
equivalent to ISO 4000), 0.7 EV (Hi 0.7, equivalent to ISO 5000), or 1.0 EV (Hi 1,  
equivalent to ISO 6400). Auto and scene modes also offer an AUTO option, which  
allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting  
conditions.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A AUTO  
If the mode dial is rotated to P, S, A, or M after AUTO is selected for ISO sensitivity in another  
mode, the ISO sensitivity last selected in P, S, A, or M mode will be restored.  
A Hi 0.3–Hi 1  
Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion.  
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1  
Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in  
most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are recommended.  
A The Shooting Menu  
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity  
settings option in the shooting menu (0 149).  
A See Also  
For information on enabling auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, or M modes, see page 149.  
For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at  
high ISO sensitivities, see page 151. For information on displaying ISO sensitivity in the  
viewfinder, see page 158. For information on using the Fn (E) button and the command dial  
to select ISO sensitivity, see page 163.  
z
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interval Timer Photography  
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.  
1 Select Interval timer shooting.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight the shooting menu tab (C) and  
press 2 to display the shooting menu, then  
highlight Interval timer shooting and  
press 2.  
G button  
2 Select a starting trigger.  
Choose from the following starting triggers:  
To start shooting immediately, highlight Now and  
press 2. Shooting begins about 3 s after  
settings are completed (proceed to Step 4).  
To choose a starting time, highlight Start time and  
press 2 (see Step 3).  
z
3 Choose a start time.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours or minutes; press  
1 or 3 to change. The starting time is not  
displayed if Now is selected for Choose start  
time. Press 2 to continue.  
4 Choose an interval.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours, minutes, or  
seconds; press 1 or 3 to change. Choose an  
interval longer than the slowest anticipated  
shutter speed. Press 2 to continue.  
5 Choose the number of intervals.  
Press 4 or 2 to highlight number of intervals;  
press 1 or 3 to change. Press 2 to continue.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Start shooting.  
Highlight Start > On and press J (to return to  
the shooting menu without starting the interval  
timer, highlight Start > Off and press J). The  
first shot will be taken at the specified starting  
time, or after about three seconds if Now was  
selected for Choose start time in Step 2. The self-timer lamp blinks while  
shooting is in progress; shooting will continue at the selected interval until all  
shots have been taken. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed  
to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot, the interval  
between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary.  
D Before Shooting  
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view  
the results in the monitor. To ensure that shooting starts at the desired time, check that the  
camera clock is correctly set (0 20). Settings can not be changed while interval timer  
photography is in progress.  
z
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins.  
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the EN-EL9a battery is fully charged or use  
an optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector.  
D Bracketing  
Bracketing can not be used with interval timer shooting.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
Before starting the interval timer, remove the  
rubber eyecup (q) and insert the supplied  
DK-5 eyepiece cap as shown (w). This  
prevents light entering via the viewfinder  
interfering with exposure. Hold the camera  
firmly when removing the eyepiece cup.  
DK-5 eyepiece cap  
q
w
A Release Mode  
Regardless of the mode selected, the camera automatically takes one photograph at each  
interval; the self-timer and remote control can not be used. Camera noise is reduced in quiet  
shutter-release mode.  
A Interrupting Interval Timer Shooting  
To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the mode dial to another  
position. Returning the monitor to the storage position does not interrupt interval timer  
shooting.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two-Button Reset  
The camera settings listed below can be restored to  
default values by holding the R and P buttons down  
together for more than two seconds (these buttons are  
marked by a green dot). The information display turns off  
briefly while settings are reset.  
R button  
P button  
Option  
Image quality (0 62)  
Image size (0 64)  
White balance (0 96)  
Fine tuning (0 98)  
ISO sensitivity (0 74)  
Auto and scene modes  
P, S, A, M  
Release mode (0 65)  
Focus mode (0 54)  
Live view autofocus (0 43)  
i, k, p, o  
j, l, m, r, s, t, u, v, w,  
x, y, z, 1, 2, 3, P, S, A, M  
n, 0  
AF-area mode (0 56)  
l, n, r, t, u, v, x, y, z,  
0, 1, 2, 3  
Default  
JPEG normal  
Large  
Option  
Focus point (0 58) 1  
Metering (0 88)  
Default  
Center  
Matrix  
Off  
Auto  
Off  
Auto  
0
AE-L/AF-L button hold (0 89)  
Active D-Lighting (0 94)  
Bracketing (0 103)  
Picture Control  
AUTO  
200  
Single frame  
AF-A  
None  
Off  
modifications (0 106) 2  
Flash compensation (0 92)  
Exposure compensation  
(0 90)  
z
Off  
Flash mode (0 71)  
i, k, p, n, w  
Face priority  
Wide area  
Auto  
Auto+red-eye  
reduction  
Auto slow sync  
Fill flash  
s
Normal area  
o
0, P, S, A, M  
Flexible program (0 81)  
Single point  
Off  
1 Focus point not displayed if Auto-area is  
selected for AF-area mode.  
2 Current Picture Control only.  
m, w  
Dynamic area  
Auto-area  
i, j, k, p, o, s, P, S, A, M  
D Live View  
Two-button reset is not available in live view.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
t
P, S, A, and M modes offer control over a variety of advanced settings, including shutter  
speed and aperture, metering, flash compensation, and white balance.  
Shutter Speed and Aperture ....................................................................................... 80  
Mode P (Programmed Auto)................................................................................................... 81  
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)............................................................................................... 82  
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)........................................................................................... 83  
Mode M (Manual)........................................................................................................................ 84  
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) .............................................................................. 86  
Exposure ......................................................................................................................... 88  
Metering......................................................................................................................................... 88  
Autoexposure Lock..................................................................................................................... 89  
Exposure Compensation.......................................................................................................... 90  
Flash Compensation .................................................................................................................. 92  
Active D-Lighting........................................................................................................................ 94  
t
White Balance ................................................................................................................ 96  
Fine-Tuning White Balance...................................................................................................... 98  
Preset Manual............................................................................................................................... 99  
Bracketing....................................................................................................................... 103  
Picture Controls ............................................................................................................. 106  
Selecting a Picture Control...................................................................................................... 106  
Modifying Existing Picture Controls..................................................................................... 108  
Creating Custom Picture Controls ........................................................................................ 111  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls .......................................................................................... 113  
The GP-1 GPS Unit ......................................................................................................... 114  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shutter Speed and Aperture  
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter  
speed and aperture:  
Mode  
Description  
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure.  
Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which  
there is little time to adjust camera settings.  
Programmed auto  
(0 81)  
P
S
Shutter-priority auto User chooses shutter speed; camera selects aperture for best  
(0 82)  
results. Use to freeze or blur motion.  
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best  
results. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and  
background into focus.  
Aperture-priority auto  
(0 83)  
A
User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed  
to “bulb” or “time” for long time-exposures.  
M
Manual (0 84)  
D Lens Aperture Rings  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 194), lock the aperture ring at the  
minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture  
ring.  
t
A Shutter Speed and Aperture  
The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and  
aperture. Fast shutter speeds and larger apertures freeze moving objects and soften  
background details, while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and  
bring out background details.  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Fast shutter speed  
Slow shutter speed  
(1 s)  
Small aperture (f/22) Large aperture (f/5.6)  
(Remember, the higher the f-number, the  
smaller the aperture.)  
(1/1,600 s)  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode P (Programmed Auto)  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and  
other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed  
and aperture. To take photographs in programmed auto:  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.  
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
A Flexible Program  
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed  
and aperture can be selected by rotating the  
command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate the dial  
to the right for large apertures (low f-numbers) that  
blur background details or fast shutter speeds that  
“freeze” motion. Rotate the dial to the left for small  
t
Command dial  
apertures (high f-numbers) that increase depth of  
field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All  
combinations produce the same exposure. While flexible program is in effect, a U (R)  
indicator appears in the viewfinder and information display. To restore default shutter speed  
and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed,  
choose another mode, or turn the camera off.  
A The Exposure Program  
See page 216 for information on the built-in exposure program.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera  
automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. Use slow  
shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects, fast shutter speeds to  
“freeze” motion.  
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)  
Slow shutter speed (1 s)  
Mode dial  
To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:  
1 Rotate the mode dial to S.  
t
2 Choose a shutter speed.  
Shutter speed is shown in the viewfinder and  
information display. Rotate the command  
dial to choose the desired shutter speed  
from values between 30 s and 1/4,000 s.  
Command dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically  
selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. Large apertures  
(low f-numbers) reduce depth of field, blurring objects behind and in front of the  
main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of field, bringing out  
details in the background and foreground. Short field depths are generally used in  
portraits to blur background details, long field depths in landscape photographs to  
bring the foreground and background into focus.  
Small aperture (f/22)  
Large aperture (f/5.6)  
Mode dial  
To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:  
1 Rotate the mode dial to A.  
t
2 Choose an aperture.  
Aperture is shown in the viewfinder and  
information display. Rotate the command  
dial to choose the desired aperture from  
values between the minimum and  
maximum for the lens.  
Command dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode M (Manual)  
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. To take  
photographs in manual exposure mode:  
Mode dial  
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
2 Choose aperture and shutter speed.  
Checking the exposure indicator (085), adjust shutter speed and aperture.  
Shutter speed is selected by rotating the command dial: choose from values  
between 30 s and 1/4,000 s or select “bulb” to hold the shutter open indefinitely  
for a long time-exposure (086). Aperture is selected by pressing the N (E)  
button and rotating the command dial: choose from values between the  
minimum and maximum for the lens. Shutter speed and aperture are shown in  
the viewfinder and information display.  
t
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Command  
N(E) button Command  
dial  
dial  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Exposure Indicator  
If a CPU lens is attached and a shutter speed other than “bulb” or “time” is selected, the  
exposure indicator in the viewfinder and information display shows whether the  
photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. Depending on the option  
chosen for Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl.; 0156), the amount of under-  
or over-exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. If the limits of the exposure  
metering system are exceeded, the indicator will flash.  
Custom Setting b1 set to 1/3 step  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by 1/3 EV  
Overexposed by over 2 EV  
A Reverse Indicators  
If  
(V) (the default setting) is selected for Custom Setting f5 (Reverse  
indicators, 0164), the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and information display are  
displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Select  
(W) to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right.  
t
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)  
Shutter speeds of “bulb” and “time” can be used  
for long time-exposure photographs of moving  
lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks. To  
prevent blurring caused by camera shake, use a  
tripod and an optional remote control or remote  
cord (0203).  
Length of exposure: 35 s  
Aperture: f/25  
Shutter speed  
Description  
Shutter remains open while shutter-release button is held down. Tripod and  
optional MC-DC2 remote cord are recommended to prevent blur.  
Bulb  
Optional ML-L3 wireless remote control required (0203). Shutter opens when  
shutter-release button on remote control is pressed and remains open for thirty  
minutes or until shutter-release button is pressed a second time.  
Time  
1 Ready the camera.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To prevent  
loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged EN-EL9a  
battery or an optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector. Note that  
noise may be present in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for the  
Long exp. NR option in the shooting menu (0148). If you are using an  
optional remote cord, attach it to the camera.  
t
Mode dial  
2 Rotate the mode dial to M.  
3 Choose a shutter speed.  
Rotate the command dial until “Bulb”  
(A) appears in the viewfinder or  
information display. For a shutter speed of  
“Time” (&), select delayed remote or quick-  
response remote mode after choosing the  
Command dial  
shutter speed (065).  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Open the shutter.  
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or remote  
cord all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until the  
exposure is complete. If you are using a remote cord, see the manual provided  
with the product for more information.  
Time: Press the shutter-release button on the remote control all the way down.  
The shutter will open immediately (quick-response remote) or two seconds  
after the shutter-release button is pressed (delayed remote) and remain open  
until the button is pressed a second time.  
5 Close the shutter.  
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.  
Time: Press the shutter-release button on the remote control all the way down.  
Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes.  
A Self-timer Mode  
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of “Bulb” is equivalent to approximately 1/10 s.  
t
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure  
Metering  
Choose how the camera sets exposure in P, S, A, and M modes (in other modes, the  
camera selects the metering method automatically).  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display metering options.  
Highlight the current metering method in the  
t
information display and press J.  
3 Choose a metering method.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J.  
Method  
Matrix  
Description  
Produces natural results in most situations. Camera uses 420-pixel RGB  
sensor to meter a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to  
tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G or D lenses  
(0194), range information (3D color matrix metering II; with other CPU  
lenses, camera uses color matrix metering II, which does not include 3D  
range information).  
L
Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area.  
Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an  
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.  
Camera meters current focus point; use to meter off-center subjects (if  
Auto-area is selected for AF-area mode as described on page 56, camera  
will meter center focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly  
exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker.  
Center-  
weighted  
M
N
Spot  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Autoexposure Lock  
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure:  
1 Select center-weighted (M) or spot (N) metering  
(088).  
Matrix metering (L) will not produce the desired results.  
Shutter-release  
button  
2 Lock exposure.  
Position the subject in the selected focus point and press  
the shutter-release button halfway. With the shutter-  
release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned  
in the focus point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus  
and exposure.  
t
AE-L/AF-L button  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will  
appear in the viewfinder.  
3 Recompose the photograph.  
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot.  
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the  
metered value for exposure:  
Mode  
Setting  
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 081)  
Shutter speed  
Programmed auto  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto  
Aperture  
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.  
A See Also  
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0156), exposure will  
lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For information on changing the  
role of the AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f2 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0164).  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Compensation  
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the  
camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with  
center-weighted or spot metering (088).  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display exposure compensation options.  
Highlight exposure compensation in the  
information display and press J.  
t
3 Choose a value.  
Highlight a value and press J. Exposure  
compensation can be set to values between  
–5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure)  
in increments of 1/3 EV. In general, choose  
positive values to make the subject brighter,  
negative values to make it darker.  
–1 EV  
No exposure compensation  
+1 EV  
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0. Exposure  
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The E Button  
Exposure compensation can also be  
set by pressing the E button and  
rotating the command dial. The  
selected value is shown in the  
viewfinder and information display.  
E button Command dial  
–0.3 EV  
+2 EV  
A Mode M  
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and  
aperture do not change.  
A Using a Flash  
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash  
level.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure  
compensation, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0156). For  
information on automatically varying exposure over a series of photographs to “bracket” a  
selected exposure compensation value, see “Bracketing” (0103).  
t
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash Compensation  
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the  
camera, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.  
Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced  
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display flash compensation options.  
Highlight flash compensation in the information  
t
display and press J.  
3 Choose a value.  
Highlight a value and press J. Flash  
compensation can be set to values between  
–3 EV (darker) and +1 EV (brighter) in increments  
of 1/3 EV. In general, choose positive values to  
make the subject brighter, negative values to  
make it darker.  
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0.0. Flash  
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Y (M) and E Buttons  
Flash compensation can also be set by  
rotating the command dial while  
pressing the Y (M) and E buttons.  
The selected value is shown in the  
viewfinder and information display.  
Y (M) button  
E button  
Command dial  
–0.3 EV  
+1 EV  
A Optional Flash Units  
Flash compensation is also available with an optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, or  
SB-R200 flash units.  
A Exposure Increments  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available when setting flash  
compensation, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0156).  
t
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Active D-Lighting  
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs  
with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when  
photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking  
pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with  
matrix metering (L; 088).  
Active D-Lighting: XOff  
Active D-Lighting: G Auto  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
t
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display Active D-Lighting options.  
Highlight Active D-Lighting in the information  
display and press J.  
3 Choose an option.  
Highlight G Auto, H Extra high, P High,  
Q Normal, R Low, or X Off and press J.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Active D-Lighting  
Noise (graininess, banding, and mottling) may appear in photographs taken with Active  
D-Lighting at high ISO sensitivities. If center-weighted or spot metering is selected, settings  
other than X Off are equivalent to Q Normal. In mode M, an Active D-Lighting setting of  
G Auto is equivalent to Q Normal.  
D “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”  
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to  
optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0174)  
optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting.  
A The Shooting Menu  
Active D-Lighting can also be adjusted using the Active D-Lighting  
option in the shooting menu (0148).  
A See Also  
For information on using the Fn (E) button and command dial to  
select Active D-Lighting, see page 163. For information on  
automatically varying Active D-Lighting over two photographs  
(one with Active D-Lighting off, the second with the current setting  
for Active-D-Lighting), see page 103.  
t
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White Balance  
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source.  
Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; in P, S, A, and M modes,  
other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source:  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display white balance options.  
Highlight the current white balance setting in  
the information display and press J.  
t
3 Choose a white balance option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J.  
v Auto  
H
N
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
Cloudy  
M
Shade  
J
Incandescent  
Fluorescent (097)  
L Preset manual (099)  
I
G
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Shooting Menu  
White balance can be selected using the White balance option in  
the shooting menu (0148), which also can be used to fine-tune  
white balance (098) or measure a value for preset white balance  
(099).  
The I Fluorescent option in the White balance menu can be used  
to select the light source from the bulb types shown at right.  
A Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color  
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to  
the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5,000–  
5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent  
light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature  
appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the following  
color temperatures:  
t
I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2,700 K  
J (incandescent)/  
I (warm-white fluorescent): 3,000 K  
I (white fluorescent): 3,700 K  
I (cool-white fluorescent): 4,200 K  
I (day white fluorescent): 5,000 K  
H (direct sunlight): 5,200 K  
N (flash): 5,400 K  
G (cloudy): 6,000 K  
I (daylight fluorescent): 6,500 K  
I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7,200 K  
M (shade): 8,000 K  
A The Fn Button  
For information on using the Fn (E) button and the command dial for white balance, see  
page 0163.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the  
light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is  
fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu.  
1 Display white balance options.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2to display white balance  
options.  
G button  
2 Select a white balance option.  
Highlight an option other than Preset  
manual and press 2(if Fluorescent is  
selected, highlight a lighting type and press  
2). The fine-tuning options shown at right  
will be displayed. Fine-tuning is not  
available with Preset manual white balance.  
Coordinates  
Adjustment  
t
Increase green  
3 Fine tune white balance.  
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white  
balance.  
Increase  
blue  
Increase  
amber  
Increase magenta  
A White Balance Fine Tuning  
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the  
cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected will  
make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.  
4 Press J.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Manual  
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting  
under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two  
methods are available for setting preset white balance:  
Method  
Measure  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photo  
and white balance measured by camera (see below).  
Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card (0102).  
Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance  
1 Light a reference object.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the  
final photograph.  
2 Display white balance options.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2to display white balance  
options.  
t
G button  
3 Select Preset manual.  
Highlight Preset manual and press 2.  
4 Select Measure.  
Highlight Measure and press 2. The menu  
shown at right will be displayed; highlight  
Yes and press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed before the camera enters preset  
measurement mode.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the camera is ready to measure white  
balance, a flashing D (L) will appear in  
the viewfinder and information display.  
5 Measure white balance.  
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the  
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder  
and press the shutter-release button all the  
way down. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured  
accurately even when the camera is not in focus.  
6 Check the results.  
If the camera was able to measure a value for  
white balance, the message shown at right  
will be displayed and a will flash in the  
viewfinder for about eight seconds before  
the camera returns to shooting mode. To  
return to shooting mode immediately, press  
the shutter-release button halfway.  
t
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the  
camera may be unable to measure white  
balance. A message will appear in the  
information display and a flashing b a  
will appear in the viewfinder. Press the  
shutter-release button halfway to return to  
Step 4 and measure white balance again.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Measuring Preset White Balance  
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode  
will end when the exposure meters turn off. The auto meter-off delay can be changed using  
Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0157). The default setting is eight seconds.  
D Preset White Balance  
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time; the existing value will  
be replaced when a new value is measured. When shooting in mode M, check the exposure  
indicator to ensure that the subject is neither under- nor over-exposed (085).  
A Other Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance  
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset white balance in the  
information display (096), press J for a few seconds. If white balance has been assigned to  
the Fn (E) button (0163) and preset white balance selected by pressing the Fn (E) button  
and rotating the command dial, the camera will also enter preset measurement mode if the  
Fn (E) button is pressed for a few seconds.  
A Studio Settings  
In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object when measuring  
preset white balance.  
t
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying White Balance from a Photograph  
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the  
memory card.  
1 Select Preset manual.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight White balance in the shooting  
menu and press 2to display white balance  
options. Highlight Preset manual and press  
2.  
G button  
2 Select Use photo.  
Highlight Use photo and press 2.  
3 Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and press 2(to skip  
the remaining steps and use the image last  
selected for preset white balance, select This  
image).  
t
4 Choose a folder.  
Highlight the folder containing the source  
image and press 2.  
5 Highlight the source image.  
To view the highlighted image full frame,  
press and hold the X button.  
6 Copy white balance.  
Press J to set preset white balance to the  
white balance value for the highlighted  
photograph.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bracketing  
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance slightly  
with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is  
difficult to set exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance and there is not time to  
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different  
settings for the same subject.  
1 Choose a bracketing option.  
Press the G button to display the menus,  
highlight Custom Setting e2 (Auto  
bracketing set), and press 2.  
G button  
Highlight one of the following options and  
press J.  
t
Option  
Description  
AE bracketing Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.  
k
Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates three images,  
each with a different white balance. Not available at image quality  
settings that include NEF (RAW).  
WB  
m bracketing  
ADL  
bracketing  
Take one photograph with Active D-Lighting off, the other at the  
current setting for Active D-Lighting.  
!
A Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture  
(mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If On is selected for ISO sensitivity auto control  
(0149) in modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum  
exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded. In mode M, shutter  
speed will only be changed after the camera has adjusted ISO sensitivity.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
R button  
Information display  
P button  
3 Display bracketing options.  
Highlight the indicator for the selected  
bracketing mode and press J.  
4 Select a bracketing increment.  
AE bracketing: Highlight a bracketing  
t
increment and press J. Choose from values  
between 0.3 EV (AE 0.3) and 2.0 EV (AE 2.0).  
WB bracketing: Highlight a bracketing  
increment and press J. Choose from increments of 1 (WB 1), 2 (WB 2), and 3  
(WB 3).  
ADL bracketing: Highlight ADL and press J.  
A The Fn (E) Button  
Bracketing increment selection can also be assigned to the Fn (E) button (0163).  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
AE bracketing: The camera will vary exposure  
with each shot. The first shot will be taken at  
the value currently selected for exposure compensation. The bracketing  
increment will be subtracted from the current value in the second shot and  
added in the third shot, “bracketing” the current value. The modified values can  
be higher or lower than the maximum and minimum values for exposure  
compensation and are reflected in the values shown for shutter speed and  
aperture. Bracketing ends automatically after the third shot is taken.  
1st shot: unmodified  
2nd shot: exposure reduced 3rd shot: exposure increased  
A The Bracketing Progress Indicator  
During AE bracketing, progress is shown by the bracketing  
indicator in the information display:  
t
v: Camera ready to take first shot.  
w: Camera ready to take second shot.  
x: Camera ready to take third shot.  
WB bracketing: Each shot is processed to create three copies, one at the current  
white balance setting, one with increased amber, and one with increased blue.  
If there is not enough space available on the  
memory card to record three images, the  
exposure count display in the viewfinder will  
flash. Shooting can begin when a new  
memory card is inserted.  
ADL bracketing: The first shot after bracketing is activated is taken with Active  
D-Lighting off, the second at the current Active D-Lighting setting (094; if  
Active D-Lighting is off, the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set  
to Auto). Bracketing ends automatically after the second shot.  
In continuous release mode, shooting will pause after each bracketing cycle. If the  
camera is turned off before all shots in the bracketing sequence have been taken,  
bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is  
turned on. To cancel bracketing before all frames have been recorded, rotate the  
mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Picture Controls  
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing  
settings, including sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue, among  
compatible devices and software.  
Selecting a Picture Control  
The camera offers six preset Picture Controls. In P, S, A, and M modes, you can choose  
a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene (in other modes, the  
camera selects a Picture Control automatically).  
1 Place the cursor in the information display.  
If shooting information is not displayed in the monitor, press the R button.  
Press the P button to place the cursor in the information display.  
t
R button  
Information display  
P button  
2 Display preset Picture Controls.  
Highlight the current Picture Control in the  
information display and press J.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Choose a Picture Control.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J.  
Option  
Description  
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most  
situations.  
Q Standard  
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that  
will later be extensively processed or retouched.  
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for  
photographs that emphasize primary colors.  
R Neutral  
S Vivid  
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.  
e Portrait  
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.  
f Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.  
A The Shooting Menu  
Picture Controls can also be selected and modified from the shooting  
menu (0148). Set Picture Control can be used to modify existing  
Picture Controls (0108). Choose Manage Picture Control to create  
custom Picture Controls (0111) or copy custom Picture Controls to a  
memory card to be shared among compatible devices and software  
(0113).  
t
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying Existing Picture Controls  
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls can be modified to  
suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced  
combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make manual  
adjustments to individual settings.  
1 Display the Picture Control menu.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Set Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight the desired Picture Control and  
press 2.  
t
3 Adjust settings.  
Press 1or 3to highlight the desired setting  
and press 4or 2to choose a value (0109).  
Repeat this step until all settings have been  
adjusted, or select Quick adjust to choose a  
preset combination of settings. Default  
settings can be restored by pressing the O  
button.  
4 Press J.  
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls  
Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are  
indicated by an asterisk (“*”).  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Picture Control Settings  
Option  
Description  
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect  
of the selected Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).  
For example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid.  
Not available with Neutral, Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.  
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening  
Quick adjust  
Sharpening automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from values between  
0 (no sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the sharpening).  
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene, or  
choose from values between –3 and +3 (choose lower values to prevent  
highlights in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,  
higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast  
Contrast  
subjects). Not available when Active D-Lighting (094) is on; reset if Active  
D-Lighting is activated after value is changed.  
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced brightness. Does not  
Brightness affect exposure. Not available when Active D-Lighting (094) is on; reset if  
Active D-Lighting is activated after value is changed.  
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically  
Saturation according to the type of scene, or choose from values between –3 and +3  
(lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it).  
t
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make reds more purple,  
blues more green, and greens more yellow, positive values (up to +3) to  
Hue  
make reds more orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.  
Filter  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. Choose  
effects  
from OFF (the default setting), yellow, orange, red, and green (0110).  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-and-  
white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green,  
Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue, Red Purple (0110).  
Toning  
D “A” (Auto)  
Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in  
the frame.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Picture Control Grid  
Pressing the X button in Step 3 displays a Picture Control grid  
showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control  
in relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed  
when Monochrome is selected). Release the X button to return to  
the Picture Control menu.  
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation  
are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines appear  
parallel to the axes of the grid.  
A Previous Settings  
The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu  
indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference  
when adjusting settings.  
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)  
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.  
The following filter effects are available:  
t
Option  
Yellow  
Description  
Y
O
R
G
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in  
Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red  
more contrast than orange.  
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.  
Red  
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those  
produced by physical glass filters.  
A Toning (Monochrome Only)  
Pressing 3when Toning is selected displays saturation options.  
Press 4or 2to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available  
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Custom Picture Controls  
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as  
custom Picture Controls.  
1 Select Manage Picture Control.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Manage Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
2 Select Save/edit.  
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.  
3 Select a Picture Control.  
t
Highlight an existing Picture Control and  
press 2, or press J to proceed to step 5 and  
save a copy of the highlighted Picture  
Control without further modification.  
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.  
See page 109 for more information. To  
abandon any changes and start over, press  
the O button. Press J when settings are  
complete.  
5 Select a destination.  
Highlight a destination for the custom  
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press  
2.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Name the Picture Control.  
The text-entry dialog shown at right will be  
displayed. By default, new Picture Controls  
are named by adding a two-digit number  
(assigned automatically) to the name of the  
existing Picture Control. This name can be  
edited to create a new name of up to 19  
characters as described on page 152.  
Keyboard area  
Name area  
The new Picture Control will appear in the  
Picture Control list.  
A Manage Picture Control > Rename  
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time  
using the Rename option in the Manage Picture  
Control menu.  
t
A Manage Picture Control > Delete  
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control  
menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture  
Controls when they are no longer needed.  
A Custom Picture Controls  
The edit display for custom Picture Controls contains  
the same options as the original preset Picture Control  
on which it is based. The original control is shown by  
an icon in the top right corner of the display.  
Original Picture  
Control icon  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls  
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with  
ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card  
and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can  
be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and  
then deleted when no longer needed.  
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the  
memory card, or to delete Custom Picture Controls  
from the memory card, highlight Load/Save in the  
Manage Picture Control menu and press 2. The  
following options will be displayed:  
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from  
the memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1  
through C-9 on the camera and name them as  
desired.  
Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture  
Controls from the memory card. The confirmation  
dialog shown at right will be displayed before a  
Picture Control is deleted; to delete the selected  
Picture Control, highlight Yes and press J.  
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1  
through C-9) from the camera to a selected  
destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.  
t
A Saving Custom Picture Controls  
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The  
memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The preset  
Picture Controls supplied with the camera (Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome,  
Portrait, and Landscape) can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or deleted.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The GP-1 GPS Unit  
The GP-1 GPS unit (available  
separately) can be connected to the  
camera’s accessory terminal using the  
cable supplied with the GP-1, allowing  
information on the camera’s current  
position to be recorded when  
photographs are taken. Turn the  
camera off before connecting the GP-1;  
for more information, see the GP-1  
manual.  
When the camera establishes communication with the  
GP-1, a h icon will appear in the information display.  
Photo information for pictures taken while the h  
icon is displayed will include an additional page of GPS  
data (0121). GPS data are only recorded when the  
h
icon is displayed; confirm that the icon appears in the  
information display before shooting (a flashing icon indicates that the GP-1 is searching  
for a signal; pictures taken while the icon is flashing do not include GPS data). If no data  
are received from the GP-1 for two seconds, the h icon will clear from the display  
and the camera will stop recording GPS information.  
t
Setup Menu Options  
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.  
Auto meter off: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when  
the GP-1 is attached.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the  
time given in Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0157). This reduces the drain  
on the battery, but GPS data may not be recorded if the shutter-release button is  
pressed all the way down without pausing.  
Enable  
Exposure meters do not turn off while the GP-1 is connected; GPS data will always  
be recorded.  
Disable  
Position: This item is only available if the GP-1 is connected,  
when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude, and  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by the GP-1.  
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More on Playback  
I
This chapter describes how to view photographs and details the operations that can  
be performed during playback.  
Full-Frame Playback...................................................................................................... 116  
Photo Information ...................................................................................................................... 117  
Thumbnail Playback ..................................................................................................... 122  
Calendar Playback......................................................................................................... 123  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ....................................................................... 124  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion .................................................................... 125  
Deleting Photographs .................................................................................................. 126  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback............................................................... 126  
The Playback Menu .................................................................................................................... 127  
I
Slide Shows..................................................................................................................... 129  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Full-Frame Playback  
To play photographs back, press the K button.  
The most recent photograph will be displayed in  
the monitor.  
K button  
To  
Use  
Description  
Viewadditional  
photographs  
Press 2to view photographs in order recorded, 4to view  
photographs in reverse order.  
View photo  
information  
Press 1or 3to view information about current photograph  
(0117).  
View  
W
X
See page 122 for more information on the thumbnail display.  
See page 124 for more information on playback zoom.  
thumbnails  
Zoom in on  
photograph  
Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to delete  
photo.  
Delete images  
O
Changeprotect  
status  
To protect image, or to remove protection from protected image,  
L (A)  
press  
L
(A) button (0125).  
I
Return to  
shooting mode  
/
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.  
K
Display menus  
G
See page 145 for more information.  
Create retouched copy of current photograph (0174). If  
current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a  
movie, pressing J starts movie playback (052).  
Retouch photo  
or play movie  
J
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.  
Press 1or 3to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that  
shooting data, RGB histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding  
option is selected for Display mode (0146). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS  
device was used when the photo was taken.  
1/ 12  
NIKON D5000  
1/ 12  
.
:
:
:
O
I SE RE  
D
U
C
H
I
IS  
O
,
NORM  
NAC  
T
D
AUTO  
.
LATITUDE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
.
.
L I GHT  
º
35 36. 371'  
RET  
O
U
C
H
LONGITUDE  
E
º
139 43. 696'  
35m  
ALTITUDE  
TIME(UTC)  
15/04/2009  
:
.
CO  
MM  
E
N
T
SPRI  
G
H
A
S
CO  
M
E
SP  
GN  
H
A
S
CO  
M
E
3636  
1
/
250 F11  
200  
35mm  
:
:
01 15 29  
.
RI  
N
AUTO 0,  
0
_
100D5000  
DS  
C
0001. JPG  
NOR AL  
4288x2M848  
_
100D5000  
D
S
C
0001. JPG  
AL  
15 04 2009 10 02 27  
/
/
428N8Ox2RM848  
N
I
KON  
D5000  
:
:
1/12  
N
I
KON  
D5000  
:
:
15 04  
/
/
2009 10 02 27  
1/12  
File information  
Overview data  
GPS data  
Shooting data 3  
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
TR SP  
D
AP  
1
250 F11  
MXP.  
M
ODE, I S  
O
200  
:
:
HITE  
B
A
LANCE  
SPAC  
TURE  
A
UTO, 0,  
0
WCO  
L
OR  
E
s
RGB  
E
0. 0  
PI  
C
C
TRL : ST  
A
N
DARD  
F
OCAL LE  
N
G
T
H
35mm  
QUICK ADJUST : 0  
LE  
S
18 55  
3.  
5
5.  
.
6
FN VM  
R
CO TRANNST  
ACT. D-LIGHT.  
ACT. D-LIGHT.  
S
H
A
RPE ING  
:
:
:
3
On  
A
A
V
R
BRNI  
G
H
T
ESNS  
+
1
FL  
A
S
H
O
D
E,  
,
,
Built i n TTL  
3
S
A
TUR  
A
TI  
O
:0  
:0  
H
UE  
High l i ghts  
KO D5000  
N
I
N
N
I
KO  
N
D5000  
N
I
KO  
N
D5000  
1/12  
1/12  
1/12  
N I KON D5000  
1
/
12  
RGB histogram  
Highlights  
Shooting data 1  
Shooting data 2  
I
File Information  
1
2
3
1 Protect status............................................... 125  
2 Retouch indicator....................................... 175  
3 Frame number/total number of images  
4 File name..........................................................63  
5 Image quality..................................................62  
6 Image size........................................................64  
7 Time of recording..........................................20  
8 Date of recording ..........................................20  
9 Folder name................................................. 152  
1/12  
4
5
_
100D5000  
D
S
C
0001. JPG  
AL  
15  
/
04  
/
2009 10 02 27  
428N8Ox2RM848  
9
:
:
8
7
6
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RGB Histogram *  
1 Protect status ...............................................125  
2 Retouch indicator .......................................175  
3 White balance ................................................ 96  
White balance fine-tuning ..................... 98  
4 Camera name  
5 Histogram (RGB channel). In all  
histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel  
brightness, vertical axis number of  
pixels.  
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
6 Histogram (red channel)  
7 Histogram (green channel)  
4
N I KON D5000  
1
/
12  
8 Histogram (blue channel)  
9 Frame number/total number of images  
* Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (0146).  
A Playback Zoom  
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is  
displayed, press X. Use the X and W buttons to zoom in  
and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The  
histogram will be updated to show only the data for the  
portion of the image visible in the monitor.  
N I KON D5000  
1
/
12  
I
A Histograms  
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in  
imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:  
If the image contains objects with a wide range of  
brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively  
even.  
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the  
left.  
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to  
the right.  
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while  
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can  
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to  
see photographs in the monitor.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Highlights *  
1
2
1 Protect status............................................... 125  
2 Retouch indicator....................................... 175  
3 Image highlights  
3
4 Camera name  
5 Frame number/total number of images  
Highlights  
N
I
KO  
N
D5000  
1/12  
4
5
* Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode (0146). Blinking areas indicate  
highlights.  
Shooting Data Page 1 1  
1
2
3 Metering...........................................................88  
Shutter speed ..........................................82, 84  
Aperture ....................................................83, 84  
4 Shooting mode................................28, 33, 80  
ISO sensitivity 2...............................................74  
5 Exposure compensation.............................90  
6 Focal length.................................................. 197  
7 Lens data  
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
TR SP  
D
AP  
1 250  
200  
F11  
MXP.  
M
O
D
E
, I S  
O
H
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
0 . 0  
F
OCAL LE  
N
GT  
35mm  
LE  
S
FN VM  
R
18 55  
3. 5 5. 6  
On  
A
A
V
R
+ .  
FL  
A
S
H
O
D
E,  
,
,
Built i n TTL 1 0  
I
N
I
KO  
N
D5000  
1/12  
11  
8 Focus mode..............................................54, 60  
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3.................19  
9 Flash mode......................................................71  
Flash compensation.....................................92  
10 Camera name  
10  
1 Protect status................................................125  
2 Retouch indicator .......................................175  
11 Frame number/total number of images  
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0146).  
2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.  
3 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting Data Page 2 1  
1
2
4 Color space....................................................150  
5 Picture Control.............................................106  
6 Quick adjust 2 ...............................................109  
Original Picture Control 3 .........................112  
7 Sharpening....................................................109  
8 Contrast..........................................................109  
9 Brightness......................................................109  
10 Saturation 4....................................................109  
Filter effects 5 ................................................109  
11 Hue 4 ................................................................109  
Toning 5...........................................................109  
12 Camera name  
:
:
3
4
HITE B  
A
LANCE  
A
UTO, 0,  
0
WCO  
L
O
R SPAC  
E
s
RGB  
5
PI  
C
TURE  
C
TRL  
: ST  
: 0  
A
NDARD  
QUICK ADJUST  
6
SH  
A
RPE ING  
:
:
3
0
CO TRANNST  
7
BRNIG  
HT  
ESNS :0  
8
9
S
A
TUR  
A
TI  
O
:0  
:0  
10  
11  
H
UE  
N
I
KO  
N
D5000  
1/12  
12  
13  
1 Protect status ...............................................125  
2 Retouch indicator.......................................175  
3 White balance................................................ 96  
Color temperature..................................... 97  
White balance fine-tuning ..................... 98  
Preset manual............................................. 99  
13 Frame number/total number of images  
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0146).  
2 Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.  
3 Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.  
4 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.  
5 Monochrome Picture Controls only.  
I
Shooting Data Page 3 *  
1
2
1 Protect status ...............................................125  
2 Retouch indicator .......................................175  
3 High ISO NR ..................................................151  
Long exposure NR ......................................151  
4 Active D-Lighting.......................................... 94  
5 Retouch history ...........................................174  
6 Image comment..........................................169  
7 Camera name  
.
:
:
:
3
4
5
O
I SE RE  
D
U
C
H
N I ISO  
,
NORM  
NAC  
T
D
L I GH  
T
O
R  
A
L
.
.
D
LMMIG  
H
TI  
G
RET  
O
U
C
H
ARN FILTNER  
C
WYAM  
OTYPE  
TRI  
:
.
CO  
MM  
E
N
T
RI  
N
GN  
H
A
S
CO  
M
E 3636  
SPRI  
G
H
A
S
CO  
M
E
SP  
6
.
N
I
KO  
N
D5000  
1/12  
8 Frame number/total number of images  
7
8
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0146).  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GPS Data *  
1
2
1 Protect status............................................... 125  
2 Retouch indicator....................................... 175  
3 Latitude  
4 Longitude  
5 Altitude  
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LATITUDE  
N
3
4
º
35 36. 371'  
E
LONGITUDE  
º
139 43. 696'  
35m  
ALTITUDE  
5
6
15/04/2009  
TIME(UTC)  
6 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
7 Camera name  
:
:
01 15 29  
8 Frame number/total number of images  
N
I
KO  
N
D5000  
1/12  
7
8
* Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (0114).  
Overview Data  
1
2
3
5 Histogram showing the distribution of  
tones in the image (0118).  
NIKON D5000  
1/ 12  
4
5
6 ISO sensitivity * ...............................................74  
7 Focal length.................................................. 197  
8 GPS data indicator ..................................... 114  
9 Image comment indicator...................... 169  
10 Flash mode......................................................71  
11 Flash compensation.....................................92  
12 Exposure compensation.............................90  
13 Metering...........................................................88  
14 Shooting mode................................28, 33, 80  
15 Shutter speed ..........................................82, 84  
16 Aperture ....................................................83, 84  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
6
7
8
.
1 250 F5 6  
200  
35mm  
+
.
1. 3  
1 0  
REAR  
AUTO A6,  
100D5000  
M
1
L
11  
9
10  
_
D
S
C
0001. PG  
:
15/04/2009 10 02 27  
N
OR AL  
4288x2M848  
:
I
1 Frame number/total number of images  
2 Protect status................................................125  
3 Camera name  
4 Retouch indicator .......................................175  
* Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.  
19 File name..........................................................63  
20 Image quality..................................................62  
21 Image size........................................................64  
22 Time of recording..........................................20  
23 Date of recording ..........................................20  
24 Folder name................................................. 152  
25 White balance.................................................96  
Color temperature .....................................97  
White balance fine-tuning......................98  
Preset manual..............................................99  
26 Color space................................................... 150  
1/ 12  
NIKON D5000  
17  
18  
.
1 250 F5 6  
200  
35mm  
26  
+
.
1. 3  
1 0  
REAR  
25  
24  
AUTO A6,  
M
1
19  
_
100D5000  
D
S
C
0001. JPG  
AL  
2009 10 02 27  
428N8Ox2RM848  
:
:
15  
23  
/
04  
/
22  
21 20  
17 Picture Control.............................................106  
18 Active D-Lighting .........................................94  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images, press the W button.  
Full-frame  
playback  
Calendar  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
To  
Use  
Description  
Display more  
images  
W
Press W button to increase the number of images displayed.  
Press X button to reduce the number of images displayed.  
When four images are displayed, press to view highlighted  
image full frame.  
Display fewer  
images  
X
Use multi selector or command dial to highlight images for  
full-frame playback, playback zoom (0124), deletion  
(0126), or protection (0125).  
Highlight images  
Viewhighlighted  
image  
Delete  
highlighted  
photo  
J
O
Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.  
See page 126 for more information.  
I
Change protect  
status of  
highlighted  
photo  
L (A)  
See page 125 for more information.  
Return to  
shooting mode  
/
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.  
See page 145 for more information.  
K
Display menus  
G
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calendar Playback  
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W button when 72 images are  
displayed.  
Full-frame  
playback  
Calendar  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Press the W button to toggle between the date list  
and the list of thumbnails for the selected date. Use  
the multi selector to highlight dates in the date list or  
to highlight pictures in the thumbnail list.  
Thumbnail list  
Date list  
The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or  
the thumbnail list:  
I
To  
Use  
Description  
Toggle between date  
list and thumbnail list  
Exit to thumbnail  
playback/Zoom in on  
highlighted photo  
Toggle full frame  
playback  
Press W button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail  
list. Press again to return to date list.  
W
Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.  
Thumbnail list: Press and hold X button to zoom in on  
highlighted picture.  
X
Date list: View first picture taken on selected date.  
Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.  
J
Highlight dates/  
Highlight images  
Date list: Highlight date.  
Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.  
Delete highlighted  
photo(s)  
Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.  
Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture (0126).  
O
Change protect  
status of highlighted  
photo  
L (A)  
See page 125 for more information.  
Return to shooting  
mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
/
K
Display menus  
G
See page 145 for more information.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the  
image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback. The following  
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X to zoom in to maximum of  
approximately 27 × (large images),  
20 × (medium images) or 13 × (small  
Zoom in or out  
X / W  
images). Press W to zoom out. While  
photo is zoomed in, use multi selector  
to view areas of image not visible in  
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other  
areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when zoom  
ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor is indicated by  
yellow border.  
View other  
areas of image  
Faces (up to 10) detected during zoom  
are indicated by white borders in  
navigation window. Press P and  
rotate command dial to scroll display  
to faces without changing zoom ratio.  
P+  
Select faces  
View other  
images  
Rotate command dial to view same location in other images at  
current zoom ratio.  
I
Cancel zoom  
Changeprotect  
status  
J
Cancel zoom and return to full-frame playback.  
See page 125 for more information.  
L (A)  
Return to  
shooting mode  
/
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.  
See page 145 for more information.  
K
Display menus  
G
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the L button can be used to  
protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted  
using the O button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected  
images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (023).  
To protect a photograph:  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the  
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Calendar playback  
2 Press the L (A) button.  
The photograph will be marked with a P  
icon. To remove protection from the  
photograph so that it can be deleted, display  
the photograph or highlight it in the  
thumbnail list and then press the L (A)  
button.  
I
L (A) button  
A Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the  
Playback folder menu, press the L (A) and O buttons together for about two seconds.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Photographs  
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or the photograph  
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. To delete multiple selected  
photographs, all photographs taken on a selected date, or all photographs in the  
current playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once deleted,  
photographs can not be recovered.  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback  
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar  
playback.  
2 Press the O button.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
I
3 Press the O button again.  
To delete the photograph, press the O  
button again. To exit without deleting the  
photograph, press the K button.  
A Calendar Playback  
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by  
highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O button (0123).  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Playback Menu  
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that  
depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.  
Option  
Description  
Q Selected  
Delete selected pictures.  
n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date.  
R All  
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback (0146).  
Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs  
1 Select Delete.  
To display the menus, press the G button.  
Highlight Delete in the playback menu and  
press 2.  
G button  
2 Choose Selected.  
Highlight Selected and press 2.  
I
3 Highlight a picture.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture  
(to view the highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the X button).  
4 Select the highlighted picture.  
Press the W button to select the  
highlighted picture. Selected pictures are  
marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to  
select additional pictures; to deselect a  
picture, highlight it and press W.  
W button  
5 Press J to complete the operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date  
1 Choose Select Date.  
In the delete menu, highlight Select date  
and press 2.  
2 Highlight a date.  
Press 1or 3to highlight a date.  
To view the pictures taken on the  
highlighted date, press W. Use the multi  
selector to scroll through the pictures, or  
press X to view the current picture full  
screen. Press W to return to the date list.  
W button  
3 Select the highlighted date.  
Press 2to select all pictures taken on the  
highlighted date. Selected dates are marked  
with a M icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select  
additional dates; to deselect a date,  
highlight it and press 2.  
I
4 Press J to complete the operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;  
highlight Yes and press J.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slide Shows  
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a slide show of the  
pictures in the current playback folder (0146).  
To display the slide show menu, press the G  
button and select Slide show in the playback  
menu.  
G button  
The slide show menu contains the following  
options:  
Option  
Description  
Start Start slide show.  
Frame Choose how long each picture will be  
interval displayed.  
To start the slide show, highlight Start in the slide show menu and press J. The  
following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:  
To  
Use  
Description  
I
Skip back/skip ahead  
Press 4to return to previous frame, 2to skip to next frame.  
View additional photo  
info  
Change photo info displayed (0117).  
Pause/resume slide  
show  
J
Pause show. Press again to resume.  
Exit to playback menu  
Exit to playback mode  
G
K
See page 146 for more information.  
End show and return to playback mode.  
Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting  
mode.  
Exit to shooting mode  
A dialog shown at right is displayed when the  
show ends. Select Restart to restart or Exit to  
return to the playback menu.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Q
This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer, how to print  
pictures, and how to view them on a television set.  
Viewing Photographs on TV........................................................................................ 132  
Standard Definition Devices ................................................................................................... 132  
High-Definition Devices ........................................................................................................... 133  
Connecting to a Computer .......................................................................................... 134  
Before Connecting the Camera ............................................................................................. 134  
Connecting the Camera............................................................................................................ 135  
Printing Photographs ................................................................................................... 136  
Connecting the Printer ............................................................................................................. 136  
Printing Pictures One at a Time.............................................................................................. 137  
Printing Multiple Pictures ........................................................................................................ 139  
Creating Index Prints ................................................................................................................. 142  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set ................................................................................ 143  
Q
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Photographs on TV  
The supplied EG-CP14 audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the camera to  
a television or VCR for playback or recording. A type C mini-pin High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from third-party suppliers)  
can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.  
Standard Definition Devices  
Before connecting the camera to a standard television, confirm that the camera  
video standard (0168) matches that used in the TV.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.  
2 Connect the supplied A/V cable as shown.  
Connect to  
video device  
Audio (white)  
Video (yellow)  
Connect to  
camera  
Q
3 Tune the television to the video channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed both in the camera monitor and on  
the television screen. Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.  
A PAL  
Resolution drops when images are output on a PAL device.  
A Television Playback  
Use of an EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector (available separately) is  
recommended for extended playback. When the camera is powered by an AC adapter, the  
monitor off delay is fixed at one hour.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High-Definition Devices  
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini-pin HDMI cable  
(available separately from third-party suppliers).  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.  
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.  
Connect to  
camera  
Connect to high-definition device  
(choose cable with connector for  
HDMI device)  
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.  
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or  
monitor screen; the camera monitor will remain off.  
Q
A HDMI (0168)  
At the default setting of Auto, the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI  
format for the high-definition device. The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI  
option in the setup menu (0168).  
D Close the Connector Cover  
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the  
connectors can interfere with data transfer.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Computer  
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E6 USB cable to connect the  
camera to a computer.  
Before Connecting the Camera  
Before connecting the camera, install the software on the supplied Software Suite CD  
(see the Quick Start Guide for more information). To ensure that data transfer is not  
interrupted, be sure the camera EN-EL9a battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge  
the battery before use or use an EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector  
(available separately).  
Supported Operating Systems  
The camera can be connected to computers running the following operating  
systems:  
Windows: Windows Vista Service Pack 1 (32-bit Home Basic/Home Premium/  
Business/Enterprise/Ultimate) and Windows XP Service Pack 3 (Home Edition/  
Professional).  
Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, 10.5.6)  
See the websites listed on page xvi for the latest information on supported operating  
systems.  
Supplied Software  
Nikon Transfer is used to copy photographs from the camera to the computer, where  
they can be viewed using ViewNX (Nikon Transfer can also be used to back up  
photographs and embed information in photographs as they are transferred, while  
ViewNX can be used to sort photographs, convert images to different file formats,  
and perform simple editing on NEF/RAW photographs).  
Q
A Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use  
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
D During Transfer  
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.  
A Camera Control Pro 2  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; 0202) can be used to control the camera from a  
computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is running, a capture mode indicator will be  
displayed in the viewfinder and information display.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the Camera  
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Turn the computer on.  
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.  
3 Connect the USB cable.  
Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the  
connectors at an angle.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub  
or keyboard.  
Q
4 Turn the camera on.  
5 Transfer photographs.  
Nikon Transfer will start automatically; click  
the Start Transfer button to transfer  
photographs (for more information on using  
Nikon Transfer, select Nikon Transfer help  
from the Nikon Transfer Help menu).  
Start Transfer button  
6 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends.  
Nikon Transfer will close automatically when transfer is complete.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Photographs  
To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via a direct USB connection,  
follow the steps below.  
Take photographs  
Select photographs for printing using Print set (DPOF)  
(0143)  
Connect camera to printer (see below).  
Print photographs one at a  
Print multiple photographs  
Create index prints  
time (0137)  
(0139)  
(0142)  
Disconnect USB cable  
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection  
Be sure the EN-EL9a battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5  
power connector. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection in P, S,  
A, and M modes, set Color space to sRGB (0150).  
Connecting the Printer  
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.  
Q
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Connect the USB cable.  
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or  
attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Turn the camera on.  
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge  
playback display.  
q
w
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
1 Select a picture.  
Press 4or 2to view additional pictures, or press  
1or 3to view photo information (0117). Press  
the X button to zoom in on the current frame  
(0124; press K to exit zoom). To view six  
pictures at a time, press the W button. Use the  
multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X to  
display the highlighted picture full frame.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
Q
3 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.  
Option  
Description  
Menu of page sizes will be displayed (options not  
supported by current printer are not listed). Press 1or  
Page size 3to choose page size (to print at default page size for  
current printer, select Printer default), then press J to  
select and return to previous menu.  
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to  
choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J  
to select and return to previous menu.  
No. of  
copies  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Description  
This option is available only if supported by current  
printer. Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1  
or 3to choose print style from Printer default (print  
Border using current printer settings), Print with border (print  
photo with white border), or No border, then press J  
to select and return to previous menu. Only options  
supported by current printer will be displayed.  
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1or 3to  
choose Printer default (print using current printer  
settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of  
recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J to  
Time  
stamp  
select and return to previous menu.  
This option is available only with printers that support  
cropping. Menu shown at right will be displayed. To exit  
without cropping picture, highlight No cropping and  
press J. To crop picture, highlight Crop and press 2.  
Cropping  
If Crop is selected, dialog shown at right will be  
displayed. Press X to increase size of crop, W to  
decrease. Choose position of crop using multi selector  
and press J. Note that print quality may drop if small  
crops are printed at large sizes.  
Q
4 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start  
printing. To cancel before all copies have been  
printed, press J.  
D Date Imprint  
If you select Print time stamp in the PictBridge menu when printing photographs  
containing date information recorded using Custom Setting d6 (Date imprint, 0160), the  
date will appear twice. The imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs  
are cropped or printed without a border.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Multiple Pictures  
1 Display the PictBridge menu.  
Press the G button in the PictBridge  
playback display (see Step 3 on page 137).  
G button  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight one of the following options and  
press 2.  
Print select: Select pictures for printing.  
Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures  
taken on a selected date.  
Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the Print set (DPOF)  
option in the playback menu (0146). The current print order will be  
displayed in Step 3.  
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index  
print. See page 142 for more information.  
Q
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select pictures or choose a date.  
If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in  
Step 2, use the multi selector to scroll through  
the pictures on the memory card. To display  
the current picture full screen, press and  
hold the X button. To select the current  
picture for printing, press the W button and  
press 1. The picture will be marked with a  
Z icon and the number of prints will be set  
to 1. Keeping the W button pressed, press  
1or 3to specify the number of prints (up to  
99; to deselect the picture, press 3when the  
number of prints is 1). Continue until all the  
desired pictures have been selected.  
W + 13: Choose number of copies  
D Selecting Photographs for Printing  
NEF (RAW) photographs (062) can not be  
selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW)  
processing option in the retouch menu  
(0184).  
X button: View photo full screen  
If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1or 3  
to highlight a date and press 2to toggle the  
highlighted date on or off. To view the  
pictures taken on the selected date, press  
W. Use the multi selector to scroll through  
the pictures, or press and hold X to view the  
current picture full screen.  
Q
W button: View  
photos for selected  
date  
X button: View  
highlighted photo  
full screen  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing  
options.  
5 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.  
Option  
Description  
Menu of page sizes will be displayed (0137; options not supported by current  
Page printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose page size (to print at default page  
size size for current printer, select Printer default), then press J to select and return  
to previous menu.  
Menu of border options will be displayed (0138; options not supported by  
current printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose print style from Printer  
Border default (print at current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with  
white border), or No border, then press J to select and return to previous  
menu.  
Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (0138; options not supported by  
Time current printer are not listed). Press 1or 3to choose Printer default (print at  
stamp current printer settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of recording on  
photo), or No time stamp, then press J to select and return to previous menu.  
6 Start printing.  
Q
Select Start printing and press J to start  
printing. To cancel before all copies have  
been printed, press J.  
A Errors  
See page 221 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Index Prints  
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index print  
in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (0139). Note that if the memory card  
contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.  
1 Select Index print.  
Selecting Index print in the PictBridge menu  
(0139) displays the images on the memory card  
as shown at right.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 141 (a  
warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small).  
4 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start  
printing. To cancel before all copies have  
been printed, press J.  
Q
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set  
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print  
orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF. Selecting  
Print set (DPOF) from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.  
1 Choose Select/set.  
Highlight Select/set and press 2.  
A Creating a New Print Order  
To remove all previously selected pictures from  
the print order, highlight Deselect all? and  
press J.  
2 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to scroll through the  
pictures on the memory card. To display the  
current picture in full screen, press and hold  
the X button. To select the current picture  
for printing, press the W button and press  
1. The picture will be marked with a Z icon  
and the number of prints will be set to 1.  
Keeping the W button pressed, press 1or  
3to specify the number of prints (up to 99;  
to deselect the picture, press 3when the  
Q
W + 13: Choose number of copies  
number of prints is 1). Continue until all the  
desired pictures have been selected.  
X button: View photo full screen  
3 Display imprint options.  
Press J to display data imprint options.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Select imprint options.  
Highlight the following options and press 2  
to toggle the highlighted option on or off (to  
complete the print order without including  
this information, proceed to Step 5).  
Data imprint: Print shutter speed and  
aperture on all pictures in print order.  
Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.  
5 Complete the print order.  
Highlight Done and press J to complete  
the print order.  
D Print Set (DPOF)  
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select  
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to  
modify and print the current order (0139). DPOF date and data imprint options are not  
supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on  
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.  
The Print set (DPOF) option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory  
card to store the print order.  
Q
NEF (RAW) photographs (062) can not be selected using this option. JPEG copies of NEF  
(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu  
(0184).  
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device  
after the print order is created.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Guide  
M
The current menu is displayed by pressing the G button; to select from the menus  
listed below, press 4. This chapter describes the options available in the menus  
below.  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...................................................................... 146  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options...................................................................... 148  
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ........................................................... 153  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup ................................................................................... 165  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .......................................................... 174  
m Recent Settings/O My Menu................................................................................... 190  
o
i
L
g
u
w
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images  
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D (playback menu) tab.  
G button  
The playback menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Default  
Current  
0
Option  
Default  
Off  
0
Delete  
127 Rotate tall  
146 Slide show  
146 Print set (DPOF)  
147  
147  
129  
143  
Playback folder  
Display mode  
Image review  
On  
G button D playback menu  
Playback Folder  
Choose a folder for playback:  
Option  
Description  
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Active folder in the shooting menu  
are displayed during playback. This option is selected automatically when a photo  
Current is taken. If a memory card is inserted and this option selected before photos have  
been taken, a message stating that the folder contains no images will be displayed  
during playback. Select All to begin playback.  
o
All  
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.  
G button D playback menu  
Display Mode  
Choose the information available in the playback photo  
information display (0117). Press 1or 3to highlight an  
option, then press 2to select the option for the photo  
information display. A M appears next to selected items; to  
deselect, highlight and press 2. To return to the playback  
menu, highlight Done and press J.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button D playback menu  
Image Review  
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the  
monitor immediately after shooting. If Off is selected, pictures  
can only be displayed by pressing the K button.  
G button D playback menu  
Rotate Tall  
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for display during  
playback. Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate  
orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image  
review (0147).  
Option  
Description  
Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for display in the  
camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0170)  
will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.  
On  
Off  
Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.  
o
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C (shooting menu) tab.  
G button  
The shooting menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Scene mode  
Set Picture  
Control  
Manage Picture  
Control  
Image quality  
Image size  
White balance  
ISO sensitivity  
settings  
Default  
0
Option  
Default  
0
Night landscape 33 Auto distortion  
Off  
150  
control  
Standard  
106  
111  
Color space  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
Active folder  
sRGB  
Off  
Normal  
150  
151  
151  
152  
JPEG normal  
Large  
62  
64  
96  
640 × 424 (3 : 2);  
sound on  
Movie settings  
51  
76  
Auto  
Interval timer  
shooting  
Varies; see page 78 74  
Auto 94  
Active D-Lighting  
i
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button C shooting menu  
ISO Sensitivity Settings  
Adjust ISO sensitivity (074).  
ISO Sensitivity Auto Control  
If Off is chosen for ISO sensitivity auto control in P, S, A, and M  
modes, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by  
the user (074). When On is chosen, ISO sensitivity will  
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be  
achieved at the value selected by the user (flash level is adjusted  
appropriately). The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can  
be selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the ISO sensitivity auto  
control menu (choose lower values to prevent noise; the minimum value for auto ISO  
sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200). In modes P and A, sensitivity will only be  
adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum  
shutter speed. Slower shutter speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can  
not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity. If the  
ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than the value selected for Maximum  
sensitivity, the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be used instead.  
When On is selected, the viewfinder shows ISO-AUTO and the  
information display ISO-A. These indictors blink when sensitivity  
is altered from the value selected by the user.  
i
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting  
menu to reduce noise (0151). Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when  
auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available with  
the built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 flash units), possibly preventing the  
camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button C shooting menu  
Auto Distortion Control  
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-  
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when  
shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area  
visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final  
photograph, and that the time needed to process photographs  
before recording begins may increase). This option is available  
only with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded).  
A Retouch: Distortion Control  
For information creating copies of existing photographs with reduced barrel and pin-  
cushion distortion, see page 185.  
G button C shooting menu  
Color Space  
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for  
color reproduction. Choose sRGB for photographs that will be  
printed or used “as is,with no further modification. Adobe RGB  
has a wider color gamut and is recommended for images that  
will be extensively processed or retouched after leaving the  
camera.  
A Color Space  
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that  
represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is widely used, while the Adobe  
RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is  
recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or  
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photographs  
that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or  
kiosk printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be  
printed using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.  
i
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant; applications and  
printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically. If the application  
or device does not support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually. For more  
information, see the documentation provided with the application or device.  
A Nikon Software  
ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct  
color space when opening photographs created with this camera.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button C shooting menu  
Long Exp. NR  
If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower  
than 8 s will be processed to reduce noise. The time required for  
processing is roughly equal to the current shutter speed; during  
processing, “l m” will blink in the viewfinder and  
photographs can not be taken. In continuous release mode,  
frame rates will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will  
drop. Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is  
turned off before processing is complete.  
G button C shooting menu  
High ISO NR  
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.”  
Option  
Description  
S High  
T Normal  
Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 800 and higher. While  
photographs are being processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will  
drop. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,  
and Low.  
U Low  
Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3 and higher. The  
amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is  
selected for High ISO NR.  
Off  
i
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button C shooting menu  
Active Folder  
Create, rename, or delete folders, or choose the folder in which subsequent  
photographs will be stored.  
Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored.  
Current folder  
D5000 (default folder)  
Other folders (in alphabetical  
order)  
New: Create a new folder and name it as described below.  
Rename: Select a folder from the list and rename it as described below.  
Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.  
Naming and Renaming Folders  
Folder names can be up to five characters long. To  
move the cursor in the name area, rotate the  
command dial. To enter a new letter at the current  
cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight the  
desired character in the keyboard area and press the  
Keyboard  
area  
Name area  
X button. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button.  
Press J to save changes and return to the shooting menu, or press G to exit  
without creating a new folder or changing the folder name.  
D Folder Names  
On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned  
automatically by the camera (e.g., 100D5000). Each folder can contain up to 999  
photographs. During shooting, pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the  
selected name. If a photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a  
photograph numbered 9999, the camera will create a new folder by adding one to the  
current folder number (e.g., 101D5000). The camera treats folders with the same name but  
different folder numbers as the same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON is selected for  
Active folder, photographs in all folders named NIKON (100NIKON, 101NIKON, 102NIKON,  
etc.) will be visible when Current is selected for Playback folder (0146). Renaming  
changes all folders with the same name but leaves the folder numbers intact.  
i
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Custom Settings:  
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings  
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the A (Custom Settings  
menu) tab.  
G button  
Custom Setting groups  
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings  
to suit individual preferences.  
Main menu  
L
A:Reset custom  
settings (0154)  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Custom Setting  
Reset custom settings  
Autofocus  
Default  
0
154  
A
a
a1 AF-area mode  
Varies with shooting mode; see page 78  
155  
155  
155  
156  
a2 Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a3 Live view autofocus  
a4 Rangefinder  
On  
Varies with shooting mode; see page 78  
Off  
b
Exposure  
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl.  
Timers/AE lock  
1/3 step  
156  
c
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2 Auto off timers  
c3 Self-timer  
Off  
Normal  
10 s; number of shots: 1  
1 min.  
156  
157  
157  
157  
c4 Remote on duration  
d
Shooting/display  
d1 Beep  
d2 Viewfinder grid display  
d3 ISO display  
d4 File number sequence  
d5 Exposure delay mode  
d6 Date imprint  
High  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
158  
158  
158  
159  
159  
160  
161  
d7 Live view display options  
e
Bracketing/flash  
e1 Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e2 Auto bracketing set  
TTL  
AE bracketing  
162  
162  
f
Controls  
f1 Assign E/Fn button  
f2 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f3 Reverse dial rotation  
f4 No memory card?  
Self-timer  
AE/AF lock  
No  
163  
164  
164  
164  
164  
Release locked  
f5 Reverse indicators  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
A: Reset Custom Settings  
L
Choose Yes to reset Custom Settings to default values. Custom  
Settings are not reset when a two-button reset is performed.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a: Autofocus  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a1: AF-area Mode  
This option determines how the focus point for autofocus is  
selected (056).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a2: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator  
If On is selected and lighting is poor, the built-in AF-assist  
illuminator (055) will light to assist the focus operation in  
single-servo AF (AF-S selected for focus mode, or single-servo AF  
selected in AF-A focus mode) when Auto-area is selected for AF-  
area mode or when Single point, Dynamic area, or 3D-  
tracking (11 points) is selected and the center focus point is  
used. If Off is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will not light to  
assist the focus operation. The camera may not be able to focus  
using autofocus when lighting is poor.  
AF-assist illuminator  
A See Also  
See page 197 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist. See page 212 for  
the shooting modes in which the AF-assist illuminator can be used.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a3: Live View Autofocus  
This option determines how the focus point for autofocus is  
selected in live view (043).  
L
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a4: Rangefinder  
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether the camera is  
correctly focused in manual focus mode (054; note that this function is not available  
in shooting mode M, when the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject  
is correctly exposed).  
Indicator  
Description  
Indicator  
Description  
Focus point is slightly  
behind subject.  
Camera in focus.  
Focus point is slightly in  
front of subject.  
Focus point is well  
behind subject.  
Camera can not  
determine correct  
focus.  
Focus point is well in  
front of subject.  
A Using the Rangefinder  
The rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster and is not  
available in live view. The desired results may not be achieved in situations in which the  
camera would be unable to focus using autofocus (055).  
b: Exposure  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.  
This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed,  
aperture, exposure compensation, flash compensation, and  
bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1/3 EV (1/3 step)  
or 1/2 EV (1/2 step).  
L
c: Timers/AE Lock  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
At the default setting of Off, exposure only locks when the AE-L/  
AF-L button is pressed. If On is selected, exposure will also lock  
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c2: Auto off Timers  
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no operations are  
performed during menu display and playback (Playback/menus), while  
photographs are displayed in the monitor after shooting (Image review), and how  
long the exposure meters, viewfinder, and information display remain on when no  
operations are performed (Auto meter-off). Choose shorter auto-off delays to  
reduce the drain on the battery.  
Option  
Description (all times are approximate)  
Auto-off timers are set to the following values:  
Playback/menus  
Image review  
Auto meter-off  
C Short  
D Normal  
E Long  
Short  
Normal  
Long  
8 s  
12 s  
20 s  
4 s  
4 s  
20 s  
4 s  
8 s  
1 min.  
Make separate adjustments to the Playback/menus, Image review, and Auto  
meter-off timers. When settings are complete, highlight Done and press J.  
F Custom  
A Auto off Timers  
The exposure meters will not turn off automatically when the camera is powered by an  
optional EH-5a AC adapter and EP-5 power connector. The monitor and viewfinder will not  
turn off automatically when the camera is connected to a printer via USB.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c3: Self-Timer  
Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number of shots taken each  
time the shutter-release button is pressed in self-timer mode.  
Option  
Description  
Self-timer delay Choose a shutter release delay.  
Press 1or 3to choose the number of shots taken  
each time the shutter-release button is pressed in  
self-timer mode (if a value other than 1 is selected,  
shots will be taken at 3 s intervals).  
L
Number of shots  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c4: Remote on Duration  
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the  
remote before cancelling delayed or quick-response remote  
mode and restoring single-frame, continuous, or quiet shutter-  
release mode (065). Choose shorter times for longer battery  
life.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d: Shooting/Display  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d1: Beep  
If High (high pitch) or Low (low pitch) is selected, a beep will  
sound at the selected pitch when the camera focuses in single-  
servo AF (AF-S or when shooting stationary subjects in AF-A  
focus mode), while the release timer is counting down in self-  
timer and delayed remote modes (065, 67), or when a  
photograph is taken in quick-response remote mode (067).  
The beep will not sound when Off is selected; note that in  
v (quiet shutter-release mode), Beep is not available and a  
beep does not sound when the camera focuses.  
The current setting is shown in the information display: 3 is  
displayed when the beep is on, 2 when it is off.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display  
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for  
reference when composing photographs.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d3: ISO Display  
Choose On to show the current ISO sensitivity setting in the  
L
frame count displays in the viewfinder.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d4: File Number Sequence  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file  
number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last  
number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new  
memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card  
inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or  
from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a  
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered  
9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin  
again from 0001.  
On  
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is  
formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new  
folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder  
contains 999 photographs.  
Off  
Same as for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number  
K Reset by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is  
empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.  
D File Number Sequence  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph  
numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can  
be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 and then either format the current memory  
card or insert a new memory card.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d5: Exposure Delay Mode  
At the default setting of Off, shutter is released when the shutter-release button is  
pressed. In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, On  
can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter-release  
button is pressed and the mirror is raised.  
L
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d6: Date Imprint  
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they are taken.  
Option  
Off  
Description  
The time and date do not appear on photographs.  
15.04.2009  
a Date  
The date or date and time are imprinted on  
photographs taken while this option is in effect.  
1155..0044..22000099 1100::02  
b Date and time  
c Date counter  
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp showing the number of  
days between the date of shooting and a selected date (0161).  
At settings other than Off, the selected option is indicated by a d icon in the  
information display.  
A Date Imprint  
The date is recorded in the order selected in the Time zone and date menu (0169). Date  
information is not imprinted on photographs taken in NEF (RAW) format and can not be  
added to or removed from existing pictures. To print the date of recording on photographs  
taken with date imprint off, select Time stamp in the PictBridge menu (0138, 141), or  
select Imprint date in the Print set (DPOF) menu to print the date of recording on all  
pictures in the current DPOF print order (0144).  
L
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date Counter  
Pictures taken while this option is in effect are imprinted with  
the number of days remaining until a future date or the number  
days elapsed since a past date. Use it to track the growth of a  
child or count down the days until a birthday or wedding.  
02 / 20.04.2009  
02 / 24.04.2009  
Future date (two days remaining)  
Past date (two days elapsed)  
Up to three separate dates can be stored in slots 1, 2, and 3. The  
first time you use the date counter, you will be prompted to  
select a date for slot 1; enter a date using the multi selector and  
press J. To change the date or store additional dates, highlight  
a slot, press 2, and enter the date. To use the stored date,  
highlight the slot and press J.  
To choose a date counter format, highlight Display options and  
press 2to display the menu shown at right. Highlight an option  
and press J. Highlight Done in the date counter menu and  
press J when settings are complete.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d7: Live View Display Options  
Choose the indicators available for display in live view mode  
(045). Press 1or 3to highlight an option, then press 2to  
select. A M appears next to selected items; to deselect,  
highlight and press 2. To return to the Custom Settings menu,  
highlight Done and press J (note that at least one option must  
be on).  
L
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e: Bracketing/Flash  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash  
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M modes.  
Option  
Description  
1 TTL  
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.  
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/32 (1/32 of full power). At full power,  
the built-in flash has a Guide Number of 18/59 (m/ft., ISO 200, 20 °C/68 °F).  
2
Manual  
A Manual  
A Y icon blinks in the viewfinder and information display when  
Manual is selected and the flash is raised.  
A The SB-400  
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached and turned on,  
Custom Setting e1 changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash  
control mode for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and Manual.  
A Flash Control  
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in combination  
with the built-in flash or optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400 flash units (070, 198).  
i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for a natural balance between  
the main subject and the background.  
L
Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the  
brightness of the background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in which  
the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or when exposure  
compensation is used.  
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional  
flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e2: Auto Bracketing Set  
Choose the setting (exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance) varied when  
bracketing is in effect (P, S, A, and M modes only; see page 103).  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
f: Controls  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f1: Assign E/Fn Button  
Choose the role played by the Fn (E) button.  
Fn (E) button  
Option  
Description  
E
Self-timer  
Press the Fn (E) button to toggle self-timer mode on and off (069).  
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select the  
release mode (065).  
I
Release mode *  
Image quality/ Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select image  
v
w
m
size *  
quality and size (062).  
ISO  
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select ISO  
sensitivity (074).  
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select white  
balance (P, S, A, and M modes only; 096).  
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select an Active  
D-Lighting option (P, S, A, and M modes only; 094).  
sensitivity *  
White  
balance *  
Active  
!
D-Lighting *  
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, “RAW”  
will appear in the information display and an NEF (RAW) copy will be  
recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn (E) button is pressed.  
The exposure-count displays show the number of NEF (RAW) images  
that can be recorded. To exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy,  
press the Fn (E) button again or turn the camera off.  
& +NEF (RAW)  
Press the Fn (E) button and rotate the command dial to select a  
bracketing increment (exposure and white balance bracketing) or to  
turn ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0104).  
Auto  
t
bracketing *  
L
* The item currently selected for Custom Setting f1 is shown by a white-on-black icon  
(Release mode is shown by an Fn icon).  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button  
Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button.  
AE-L/AF-L button  
.
Option  
Description  
B
C
F
AE/AF lock  
Focus and exposure lock while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
AE lock only Exposure locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
AF lock only Focus locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Exposure locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and remains locked  
E AE lock (hold) until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn  
off.  
The AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can  
not be used to focus.  
A AF-ON  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f3: Reverse Dial Rotation  
Choose Yes to reverse the direction of the command dial.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f4: No Memory Card?  
If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a  
memory card is inserted in the camera. Selecting Enable release allows the shutter  
to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be  
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). Note that  
when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2  
(available separately), photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and  
the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option.  
L
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f5: Reverse Indicators  
At the default setting of  
(V), the exposure  
indicators in the viewfinder and information display are  
displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on  
the right. Select  
(W) to display negative values  
on the left and positive values on the right.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup menu) tab.  
G button  
The setup menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Format memory  
card  
Default  
0
Option  
HDMI  
Time zone and  
Default  
Auto  
0
168  
23  
169  
LCD brightness  
0; Auto dim: on 166 date  
Graphic;  
Background color 166  
black  
Language  
169  
169  
Info display  
format  
Image comment  
Auto image  
rotation  
Image dust off ref  
photo  
On  
170  
171  
114  
Auto information  
display  
Info wrap-around  
Clean image  
sensor  
On  
Off  
168  
168  
206  
Auto meter off:  
enable  
GPS  
Eye-Fi upload 2  
Firmware version  
Enable  
173  
173  
Lock mirror up for  
208  
168  
cleaning 1  
Video mode  
1
2
Not available when battery is low.  
Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0173).  
g
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button B setup menu  
LCD Brightness  
The LCD brightness menu contains the following options:  
LCD brightness: The menu at right will be displayed; press 1or  
3to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher values for  
increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.  
Auto dim: If On is selected, the monitor will gradually dim while  
shooting information is displayed.  
G button B setup menu  
Info Display Format  
Choose from the following two formats for the information display (08). Separate  
formats can be selected for auto and scene modes on the one hand and for P, S, A, and  
M modes on the other.  
Classic (0167)  
Graphic (08)  
1 Choose the modes in which the selected  
information display will be used.  
Highlight Auto/scene modes or P, S, A, and M  
modes and press 2.  
2 Select Classic or Graphic.  
Highlight Classic or Graphic and press 2.  
g
3 Select a background color.  
Highlight a background color and press J.  
Choose from blue, black, or orange (Classic) or  
green, black, or brown (Graphic).  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The “Classic” display is shown below.  
Camera rotated 90° to shoot  
in tall (portrait) orientation  
Camera in normal orientation  
1
Programmed auto  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
1
Programmed auto  
29  
28 27 26  
5
6
4
3
17  
18  
25  
8
7
16  
15  
14  
13  
8
7
19 20 2122 23 24  
Set  
2
P
3
4
5
6
Set  
P
2
1110 9 12  
1 Shooting mode  
12 Release mode.........................65 22 “Beep” indicator ..................158  
i auto/  
13 ISO sensitivity ........................ 74 23 Number of exposures  
j auto (flash off) .............. 28  
Scene modes ...................... 33  
P, S, A, and M modes........... 80  
remaining ........................... 29  
Capture mode indicator ....134  
24 GPS connection  
indicator.............................114  
25 Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator.............................149  
26 Date imprint indicator .......160  
27 Aperture (f-number) ......83, 84  
28 Exposure indicator................ 85  
Exposure compensation  
14 White balance ........................96  
15 Image size ...............................64  
16 Image quality .........................62  
17 Bracketing indicator ...........103  
18 Manual flash indicator........162  
Flash compensation indicator  
for optional flash units....200  
19 Auto-area AF indicator.........57  
3D-tracking indicator ...........57  
Focus point..............................58  
2 Help icon............................... 221  
3 Flash mode ............................. 71  
4 Exposure compensation...... 90  
5 Flash compensation ............. 92  
6 Picture Control..................... 106  
7 Bracketing increment ........ 104  
8 Active D-Lighting.................. 94  
indicator............................... 91  
Bracketing progress indicator  
..............................................105  
29 Shutter speed...................82, 84  
9 Metering.................................. 88 20 Eye-Fi connection  
indicator .............................173  
10 AF-area mode ........................ 56  
21 Battery indicator....................28  
11 Focus mode............................ 54  
g
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button B setup menu  
Auto Information Display  
This option can be set separately for auto and scene modes and for P, S, A, and M  
modes. If On is selected, the information display will appear after the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway; if image review (0147) is off, it will also be displayed  
immediately after shooting. Choose On if you find yourself frequently referring to  
the information display during shooting. If Off is selected, the information display  
can only be viewed by pressing the R button.  
G button B setup menu  
Info Wrap-around  
If On is selected, the cursor will “wrap around” from one edge of  
the information display to the other.  
G button B setup menu  
Video Mode  
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the A/V out connector, be  
sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).  
G button B setup menu  
HDMI  
The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface) connector, allowing pictures to be played  
back on high-definition televisions or monitors using a type C  
cable (available separately from commercial suppliers). Before  
connecting the camera to high-definition device, choose an  
HDMI format. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically  
select the appropriate format.  
g
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button B setup menu  
Time Zone and Date  
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn  
daylight saving time on or off.  
Option  
Description  
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the  
new time zone.  
Time zone  
Date and time Set the camera clock (020).  
Date format Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.  
Daylight  
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be  
saving time advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.  
G button B setup menu  
Language  
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The following options are  
available:  
Option  
Description  
Danish  
Option  
Description  
Italian  
Option  
Description  
Swedish  
German  
English  
Spanish  
Finnish  
French  
Dutch  
Norwegian  
Polish  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Traditional  
Chinese  
Simplified  
Chinese  
Japanese  
Korean  
G button B setup menu  
Image Comment  
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as  
metadata in ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0202). The  
comment is also visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information  
display (0120).  
Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 152. Comments can be up to  
36 characters long.  
g
Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all  
subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned  
on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button B setup menu  
Auto Image Rotation  
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation,  
allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback or when viewed in  
ViewNX or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0202). The following orientations are  
recorded:  
Landscape (wide) orientation Camera rotated 90° clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counterclockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when  
panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.  
D Auto Image Rotation  
In continuous release mode (065), the orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all  
photographs in the same burst, even if camera orientation is changed during shooting.  
A Rotate Tall  
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,  
select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (0147).  
g
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button B setup menu  
Image Dust off Ref Photo  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available  
separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).  
Image dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the  
camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a  
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.  
1 Choose a start option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press  
J. To exit without acquiring image dust off  
data, press G.  
Start: The message shown at right will be  
displayed and “rEF” will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to  
clean the image sensor before starting. The  
message shown at right will be displayed and  
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder when  
cleaning is complete.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not  
be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select  
Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with  
existing photographs.  
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.  
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless  
white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
g
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus  
mode, set focus to infinity manually.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Acquire dust off reference data.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust  
Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is  
pressed. Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,  
increasing recording times.  
If the reference object is too bright or too dark,  
the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust  
Off reference data and the message shown at  
right will be displayed. Choose another  
reference object and repeat the process from  
step 1.  
D Image Dust Off Reference Data  
The same reference data can be used for photographs  
taken with different lenses or at different apertures.  
Reference images can not be viewed using computer  
imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed when  
reference images are viewed on the camera.  
g
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button B setup menu  
Eye-Fi Upload  
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card (available separately from  
third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera. Choose Enable to upload  
photographs to a preselected destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if  
signal strength is insufficient.  
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where  
wireless devices are prohibited.  
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is indicated by an icon  
in the information display:  
6: Eye-Fi upload disabled.  
7: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for upload.  
8 (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.  
8 (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.  
!: Disable selected for Eye-Fi upload but camera unable to turn card off; see  
“Eye-Fi Cards,” below.  
D Eye-Fi Cards  
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a warning is displayed in  
the monitor (0222), turn the camera off and remove the card.  
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi  
functions. Any support inquires should be directed to the manufacturer.  
A Supported Eye-Fi Cards  
As of March 2009, the following 2 GB Eye-Fi cards can be used: Eye-Fi Card, Eye-Fi Home,  
Eye-Fi Share, and Eye-Fi Explore. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase.  
G button B setup menu  
Firmware Version  
View the current camera firmware version.  
g
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N The Retouch Menu:  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch menu) tab.  
G button  
The retouch menu is used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs  
on the memory card, and is only available when a memory card containing  
photographs is inserted in the camera. Movies can not be retouched.  
Option  
0
Option  
0
i
D-Lighting 1  
176 & Quick retouch 1  
185  
185  
185  
185  
186  
186  
j Red-eye correction 1 176  
'
(
)
q
r
2
Straighten  
Distortion control  
Fisheye  
Color outline  
Perspective control  
Stop-motion movie 2 187  
k
l
m
Trim  
177  
178  
178  
179  
180  
182  
Monochrome 1  
Filter effects 1  
n Color balance 1  
0
Small picture  
Image overlay 2  
NEF (RAW)  
o
Side-by-side  
p
189  
comparison 3  
%
184  
processing  
1 Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control  
or JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images created with Monochrome selected for Set Picture  
Control (cross screen filter effects can be applied to monochrome images).  
2 Can only be selected by pressing G button and selecting N tab.  
3 Available only if J button is pressed in full-frame playback when a retouched image or  
original is displayed.  
A Retouching Copies  
Up to ten effects can in most cases be applied in succession to a single image, although with  
the exception of Image overlay each option can only be applied once (note that multiple  
edits may result in loss of detail). Options that can not be applied to the current image are  
grayed out and unavailable.  
u
A Image Quality  
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Small picture, Image overlay, NEF (RAW)  
processing, and Stop-motion movie, copies created from JPEG images are the same size  
and quality as the original, while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large  
fine-quality JPEG images. Time stamps added with Custom Setting d6 (Date imprint;  
0160) may however be cropped out or illegible depending on the retouch options used.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To create a retouched copy:  
1 Display a photo full frame (0116).  
A Retouch  
The camera may not be able to display or retouch  
images created with other devices.  
2 Press J to display the retouch menu.  
A Monitor off Delay  
The monitor will turn off automatically if no  
operations are performed for the length of time  
selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers).  
The default is 12 s.  
3 Display retouch options.  
Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu  
and press J.  
4 Select retouch options.  
For more information, see the section for the  
selected item. To return to full-frame playback without creating a retouched  
copy, press K.  
5 Create a retouched copy.  
Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched  
copies are indicated by a N icon.  
A Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu  
The photographs to be retouched can also be selected from the retouch menu.  
u
Highlight an option and  
Highlight a picture and  
Create retouched copy of  
selected picture.  
press 2.  
press J.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
D-Lighting  
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.  
Before  
After  
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of correction performed.  
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy  
the photograph.  
G button N retouch menu  
Red-Eye Correction  
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and  
is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The  
photograph selected for red-eye correction is previewed as  
shown at right. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and  
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that  
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results  
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not  
affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Zoom in  
X
Press X button to zoom in, W button to zoom  
out. While photo is zoomed in, use multi  
selector to view areas of image not visible in  
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll  
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation  
window is displayed when zoom buttons or  
multi selector is pressed; area currently visible  
in monitor is indicated by yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom.  
Zoom out  
W
View other  
areas of image  
Cancel zoom  
Create copy  
J
J
u
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected photograph, a copy will  
be created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No copy will  
be created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
Trim  
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The  
selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown  
in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following  
table.  
To  
Use  
X
Description  
Increase size of crop  
Reduce size of crop  
Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.  
Press the W button to reduce the size of the crop.  
W
Change crop aspect  
ratio  
Rotate the command dial to switch between aspect ratios of  
3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.  
Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the  
image.  
Move crop  
Create copy  
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.  
D Trim: Image Quality and Size  
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an image quality of JPEG  
fine (062); copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original.  
The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.  
Aspect ratio  
3 : 2  
4 : 3  
5 : 4  
1 : 1  
16 : 9  
Possible sizes  
3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856, 960 × 640, 640 × 424  
3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960, 960 × 720, 640 × 480  
3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960, 896 × 720, 608 × 480  
2,560 × 2,560, 1,920 × 1,920, 1,440 × 1,440, 960 × 960, 720 × 720, 480 × 480  
3,424 × 1,920, 2,560 × 1,440, 1,920 × 1,080, 1,280 × 720, 960 × 536, 640 × 360  
u
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
Monochrome  
Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or  
Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome).  
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview  
of the selected image; press 1to increase color  
saturation, 3to decrease. Press J to create a  
monochrome copy.  
Increase  
saturation  
Decrease  
saturation  
G button N retouch menu  
Filter Effects  
Choose from the following filter effects. After adjusting filter effects as described  
below, press J to copy the photograph.  
Option  
Description  
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the picture less  
Skylight blue. The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown  
at right.  
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the  
copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in the  
monitor.  
Warm  
filter  
Red  
intensifier  
Green  
intensifier  
Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green intensifier),  
or blues (Blue intensifier). Press the multi selector up to  
increase the effect, down to decrease.  
Blue  
intensifier  
Add starburst effects to light sources.  
Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.  
Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light sources  
affected.  
u
Cross  
screen  
Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.  
Length of points: Choose the length of points.  
Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter as shown at right.  
Press X to preview the copy full frame.  
Save: Create a retouched copy.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Description  
Add a soft filter effect. Use the multi selector to choose  
from 1 (high), 2 (normal), or 3 (low).  
Soft  
G button N retouch menu  
Color Balance  
Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color  
balance as shown below. The effect is displayed in the monitor  
together with red, green, and blue histograms (0118) giving  
the distribution of tones in the copy.  
Increase amount of green  
Create retouched copy  
Increase amount of  
Increase amount of  
blue  
amber  
Increase amount of magenta  
A Zoom  
To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press the X  
button. The histogram will be updated to show data only for the  
portion of the image displayed in the monitor. While the image is  
zoomed in, press the L (A) button to toggle back and forth  
between color balance and zoom. When zoom is selected, you can  
zoom in and out with the X and W buttons and scroll the image with  
the multi selector.  
u
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
Small Picture  
Create a small copy of the selected picture. The following sizes are available:  
Option  
Description  
0
1
2
640×480 Suited to television playback.  
320×240 Suited to display on Web pages.  
160×120 Suitable for e-mail.  
The small picture option can be used during full-frame playback as described on  
page 175. The procedure for selecting pictures after choosing Small picture from  
the retouch menu, however, differs from that described at the beginning of this  
section: instead of selecting a single photograph and then choosing a picture size,  
the user selects a picture size first and then selects one or more photographs to copy  
at the selected size as described below.  
Selecting Small picture from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.  
Follow the steps below to create small copies of multiple pictures.  
1 Select Choose size.  
Highlight Choose size and press 2.  
2 Choose the desired size.  
Highlight desired size and press J to select  
and return to the previous menu.  
3 Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and press 2.  
u
4 Select pictures.  
Highlight pictures using the multi selector  
and press the W button to select or  
deselect. Selected pictures are marked by an  
icon.  
W button  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Press J to complete the operation.  
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; highlight Yes and press J to copy  
pictures at the selected size and return to  
playback. To exit without creating copies,  
highlight No and press J, or press G to  
exit to the retouch menu.  
A Viewing Small Pictures  
Small pictures are indicated by a gray border. Playback zoom is not available when small  
pictures are displayed. Note that because small copies do not have the same aspect ratio as  
the original, the edges of the copy will be cropped out on its longest dimension.  
u
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
Image Overlay  
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single  
picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW  
data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an  
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size  
settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (062, 64; all options  
are available). To create an NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).  
1 Select Image overlay.  
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu  
and press 2. The dialog shown at right will be  
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted.  
2 Display NEF (RAW) images.  
Press J to display a picture selection dialog  
listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this  
camera.  
3 Highlight a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to highlight the first  
photograph in the overlay. To view the  
highlighted photograph full frame, press and  
hold the X button.  
4 Select the highlighted photograph.  
Press J to select the highlighted photograph  
and return to the preview display. The selected  
image will appear as Image 1.  
5 Select the second photograph.  
Press 2to highlight Image 2. Repeat Steps 2–4  
to select the second photo.  
u
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Set gain.  
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize  
exposure for the overlay by pressing 1or 3to  
set gain for the selected image to values  
between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat for the second  
image. The default value is 1.0; selecting 0.5 cuts  
gain in half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain. The  
effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.  
7 Highlight the Preview column.  
Press 4or 2to highlight the Preview column.  
8 Preview the overlay.  
Press 1or 3to highlight Overlay and press J  
(to save the overlay without displaying a  
preview, highlight Save and press J). To return  
to Step 6 and select new photos or adjust gain,  
press W.  
9 Save the overlay.  
Press J while the preview is displayed to save  
the overlay. After an overlay is created, the  
resulting image will be displayed full-frame in  
the monitor.  
+
D Image Overlay  
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed,  
aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and  
values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1.  
u
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.  
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.  
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch  
menu and press 2to display a picture selection  
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created  
with this camera.  
2 Select a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph  
(to view the highlighted photograph full frame,  
press and hold the X button). Press J to select  
the highlighted photograph and proceed to the  
next step.  
3 Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.  
Choose image quality (062), image size (064), white balance (096),  
exposure compensation (090), and a Picture Control (0106) for the JPEG  
copy. Color space (0150) and high ISO noise reduction (0151) are set to the  
values currently selected in shooting mode. Note that white balance is not  
available with pictures created with image overlay and that exposure  
compensation increments differ from those used in shooting mode.  
Image quality  
Image size  
White balance  
Exposure compensation  
Picture Control  
4 Copy the photograph.  
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy  
of the selected photograph. The resulting image  
will be displayed full-frame in the monitor. To  
exit without copying the photograph, press the  
G button.  
u
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
Quick Retouch  
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast.  
D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit  
subjects.  
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of enhancement. The effect  
can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the  
photograph.  
G button N retouch menu  
Straighten  
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2to  
rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments  
of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4to rotate it counterclockwise  
(note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square  
copy). Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to  
playback without creating a copy.  
G button N retouch menu  
Distortion Control  
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto  
to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then  
make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select  
Manual to reduce distortion manually (note that Auto is not  
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see  
page 150). Press 2to reduce barrel distortion, 4to reduce pin-  
cushion distortion (note that greater amounts of distortion  
control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to copy the  
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.  
D Auto  
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain  
other lenses excluded). Results are not guaranteed with other lenses.  
u
G button N retouch menu  
Fisheye  
Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye  
lens. Press 2to increase the effect (this also increases the  
amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image),  
4to reduce it. Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to  
exit to playback without creating a copy.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
Color Outline  
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for  
painting. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press  
J to copy the photograph.  
Before  
After  
G button N retouch menu  
Perspective Control  
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from  
the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust  
perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control  
result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to copy  
the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating  
a copy.  
Before  
After  
u
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G button N retouch menu  
Stop-Motion Movie  
Selecting Stop-motion movie from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in  
Step 1. Follow the steps below to create a stop-motion movie from photographs  
taken with the camera.  
1 Choose the frame size.  
Highlight Frame size and press 2to display a  
menu of frame size options. Highlight the  
desired frame size and press J.  
2 Choose the frame rate.  
Highlight Frame rate and press 2to display a  
menu of frame rate options. Highlight the  
desired frame rate and press J.  
3 Select Create movie.  
Highlight Create movie and press J.  
4 Select the first frame.  
Press 4and 2to select a photograph for the first  
frame (keep the multi selector pressed to scroll  
rapidly through the photographs) and press J  
to select.  
5 Select the last frame.  
Use the multi selector to choose the last frame as  
described Step 4. The pictures in the movie are  
marked with L; if the first frame is after the last  
frame, the frames in between will appear in the  
movie in reverse order. The movie can include  
up to 100 photographs.  
u
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Select Save.  
The menu shown at right will be displayed; if no  
further edits are necessary, highlight Save and  
press J to proceed to Step 7.  
To edit the movie, highlight Edit and press J.  
The following options will be displayed:  
Starting image: Choose a new starting frame.  
Middle image: Remove frames from the middle  
of the movie. Press 4and 2to highlight a  
photo, 1or 3to remove the L icon. Pictures  
from which the L has been removed will be  
removed from the movie when you press J.  
End image: Choose a new end frame.  
Cancel: Exit without making further changes.  
7 Save the movie.  
The menu shown at right will be displayed;  
highlight Save and press J to save the movie. To  
preview the movie, select Preview. The movie  
can be paused, rewound, or fast-forwarded  
during the preview. To choose a new frame rate,  
select Frame rate; to edit the movie as described  
in Step 6, select Edit.  
D Stop-motion Movies  
Stop-motion movies can not include cropped copies, small copies, or images created with  
other devices.  
A Viewing Stop-motion Movies  
Stop-motion movies are marked with a 1 icon in full-frame playback. To view a stop-motion  
movie, display it in full-frame playback and press J.  
Stop-motion files are named as described on page 63.  
u
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Side-by-Side Comparison  
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option is only available  
if the J button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is  
played back full frame.  
Making a Side-by-Side Comparison  
1 Select a picture.  
Select a retouched copy (shown by a N icon) or a  
photograph that has been retouched in full-  
frame playback and press J.  
2 Select Side-by-side comparison.  
Highlight Side-by-side comparison in the  
retouch menu and press J.  
Options used to create  
3 Compare the copy with the original.  
copy  
The source image is displayed on the left, the  
retouched copy on the right, with the options  
used to create the copy listed at the top of the  
display. Press 4or 2to switch between the  
source image and the retouched copy. To view  
the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold  
the X button. If the copy was created from two  
images using Image overlay, press 1or 3to  
view the other source image. If multiple copies  
Source Retouched  
image copy  
exist for the current source image, press 1or 3to view the other copies. To  
exit to playback mode, press the K button, or press J to return to playback  
with the highlighted image displayed.  
D Side-by-Side Comparison  
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has  
since been deleted or that was protected when the copy was made (0125).  
u
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
m Recent Settings/OMy Menu  
The camera offers a choice of two custom menus: a recent settings menu consisting of  
the twenty most recently used settings, added to the top of the menu in the order  
they are used, and My Menu, a customized list of options from the playback, shooting,  
Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus. To display the custom menu, press G  
and select the custom menu tab (m or O, depending on whether Recent settings or  
My Menu is currently selected for Choose tab).  
G button  
Choose Tab: Choosing a Custom Menu  
Both the recent settings menu and My Menu contain a Choose tab option for  
choosing the menu displayed. To switch back and forth between the recent settings  
menu and My Menu, follow the steps below.  
1 Select Choose tab.  
In the m RECENT SETTINGS menu or O MY  
MENU, highlight Choose tab and press 2.  
2 Select the desired menu.  
Highlight Recent settings or My Menu and  
press J. The selected menu will be displayed.  
m Recent Settings: Viewing Recent Settings  
The recent settings menu lists the twenty most  
recently used settings. Press 1or 3to highlight an  
option and press 2to select.  
w
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu  
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20  
options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.  
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.  
Adding Options to My Menu  
1 Select Add items.  
In My Menu, highlight Add items and press 2.  
2 Select a menu.  
Highlight the name of the menu containing the  
option you wish to add and press 2.  
3 Select an item.  
Highlight the desired menu item and press J.  
Items currently in My Menu are indicated by a  
checkmark; items indicated by a V icon can not  
be selected.  
4 Position the new item.  
Press 1or 3to move the new item up or down  
in My Menu. Press J to add the new item.  
Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional items.  
Deleting Options from My Menu  
1 Select Remove items.  
In My Menu, highlight Remove items and press 2.  
2 Select items.  
Highlight items and press 2to select or deselect.  
Selected items are indicated by a check mark.  
w
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J.  
4 Delete the selected items.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press J  
to delete the selected items.  
A Deleting Items in My Menu  
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button. A confirmation  
dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the selected item from My Menu.  
Reordering Options in My Menu  
1 Select Rank items.  
In My Menu, highlight Rank items and press 2.  
2 Select an item.  
Highlight the item you wish to move and press  
J.  
3 Position the item.  
Press 1or 3to move the item up or down in My  
Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to  
reposition additional items.  
w
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Notes  
n
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing  
the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter  
problems using the camera.  
Compatible Lenses........................................................................................................ 194  
Compatible CPU Lenses............................................................................................................ 194  
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................................. 195  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ............................................................................ 198  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)......................................................................... 198  
Other Accessories.......................................................................................................... 202  
Approved Memory Cards......................................................................................................... 203  
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter ............................................................... 204  
Caring for the Camera .................................................................................................. 205  
Storage............................................................................................................................................ 205  
Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 205  
The Low-Pass Filter ..................................................................................................................... 206  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .......................................................... 210  
Available Settings.......................................................................................................... 212  
Memory Card Capacity................................................................................................. 215  
Exposure Program......................................................................................................... 216  
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 217  
Display ............................................................................................................................................ 217  
Shooting (All Modes) ................................................................................................................. 218  
Shooting (P, S, A, M).................................................................................................................... 219  
Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 220  
Miscellaneous............................................................................................................................... 220  
Error Messages............................................................................................................... 221  
Specifications ................................................................................................................. 224  
Battery Life..................................................................................................................................... 231  
n
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Compatible Lenses  
Compatible CPU Lenses  
Autofocus is available with AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses only; autofocus is not supported  
with other autofocus (AF) lenses. IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used. The features  
available with compatible CPU lenses are listed below:  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
Metering  
L
MF (with electronic  
rangefinder)  
Autoandscene  
modes; P, S, A  
M
N
Lens/accessory  
AF  
MF  
M
3D Color  
2
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR1  
2
,
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR1  
PC-E NIKKOR series  
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D4  
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter5  
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
,
3
2
6
6
2
2
2
7
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF)  
AI-P NIKKOR  
8
1 Use AF-S or AF-I lenses to get the most from your camera. Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR  
lenses.  
2 Spot metering meters selected focus point (088).  
3 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems may not function as expected when the  
lens is shifted and/or tilted or an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.  
5 AF-S or AF-I lens required.  
6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
7 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5  
lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator may be  
displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Focus manually until  
image in viewfinder is in focus.  
8 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
A Identifying AF-S and AF-I Lenses  
AF-S lenses have names beginning with AF-S, AF-I lenses names beginning with AF-I.  
A Identifying CPU and Type G and D Lenses  
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter  
on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.  
CPU contacts  
Aperture ring  
CPU lens  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
A Lens f-number  
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.  
n
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode M. Selecting another  
mode disables the shutter release. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens  
aperture ring and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other features  
requiring a CPU lens can not be used. Some non-CPU lenses can not be used; see  
“Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses,” below.  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
Autoandscene  
MF modes; P, S, A  
Metering  
MF (with electronic  
rangefinder)  
Lens/accessory  
AF  
M
L, M, N  
1
2
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses  
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4  
Reflex NIKKOR  
2, 3  
2
4
2
2
2
PC NIKKOR  
AI-type Teleconverter  
5
1
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 6  
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;  
PN-11)  
1
2
1 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
2 Electronic analog exposure display can not be used.  
3 Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.  
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
5 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
6 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).  
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D5000:  
TC-16AS AF teleconverter  
Non-AI lenses  
Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,  
1200mm f/11)  
Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)  
2.1cm f/4  
Extension Ring K2  
180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)  
360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)  
200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)  
AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)  
PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)  
PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)  
PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)  
Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)  
n
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D The Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm, although in  
some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal  
lengths due to shadows cast by the lens, while lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-  
eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent  
shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm and can not be used in the macro range  
of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following  
lenses at ranges less than those given below:  
Lens  
Zoom position  
24 mm  
20 mm  
24 mm  
Under 24 mm  
24 mm  
28 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
24 mm  
18 mm  
18 mm  
18 mm  
24 mm  
24 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
50 mm  
24 mm  
35 mm  
250 mm  
350 mm  
24 mm  
Minimum range  
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.  
3.0 m/9 ft. 10 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S DX 12–24mm f/4G ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED  
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.  
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.  
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.  
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.  
3.0 m/9 ft. 10 in.  
AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED  
AF 18–35mm f/3.5– 4.5D ED  
AF-S DX 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G ED  
AF-S DX VR 18– 200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED  
AF 20–35mm f/2.8D  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED  
AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED  
AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED  
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5 ED *  
* When not shifted or tilted.  
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24 mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the  
entire subject at all ranges.  
D Dark Edges in the Viewfinder  
You may notice darkening of the edges of the image in the viewfinder with some lenses. This  
has no effect on photographs.  
n
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D AF-Assist Illumination  
AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:  
AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED  
AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED  
AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED  
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and  
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED  
AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED  
AF-S DX VR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED  
AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED  
A Calculating Picture Angle  
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed  
by the D5000, in contrast, is 23.6 × 15.8 mm, meaning that the picture angle of a 35mm  
camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D5000. The approximate focal length of lenses  
for the D5000 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens  
by about 1.5.  
Picture size (35mm format)  
(36 × 24 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D5000)  
(23.6 × 15.8 mm)  
Picture angle (35mm format)  
Picture angle (D5000)  
n
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)  
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with  
CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units can be attached directly to the  
camera accessory shoe as described below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a  
safety lock for flash units with a locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and  
SB-400.  
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.  
2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe.  
See the manual provided with the flash unit for details.  
The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is  
attached.  
A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter  
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera  
accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.  
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory  
shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera  
or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized  
service representative for more information.  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication  
between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography.  
n
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLS-Compatible Flash Units  
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units:  
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:  
Flash unit  
Feature  
Guide  
No. 3  
SB-900 1  
34/111  
48/157  
SB-800  
38/125  
53/175  
SB-600  
30/98  
42/138  
SB-400  
21/69  
30/98  
SB-R200 2  
10/32  
14/49  
ISO 100  
ISO 200  
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when AUTO or N (flash) is selected for white balance, the  
camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.  
2 Controlled remotely using optional SB-900, SB-800 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight  
commander.  
3 m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800 and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-900 with standard  
illumination.  
The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a CLS-compatible  
camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-  
600, or SB-R200 flash units. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.  
The following features are available with the above flash units:  
Flash unit  
Advanced Wireless Lighting  
Commander Remote  
SB-900  
SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200  
SB-900  
SB-900  
Flash mode/feature  
i-TTL i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR 2  
AA Auto aperture 2  
6
3
5
5
3
4
6
6
6
6
A
Non-TTL auto  
GN Distance-priority manual  
Manual  
7
M
RPT Repeating flash  
AF-assist for multi-area AF 2  
Flash Color Information Communication  
REAR Rear-curtain sync  
Y
Red-eye reduction  
Auto zoom  
Auto ISO sensitivity control (0149)  
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.  
2 CPU lens required.  
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit.  
4 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.  
5 Selected with flash unit.  
6 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.  
7 Can be selected with camera.  
A Guide Number  
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture.  
For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35 mm zoom head  
position); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,  
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply  
the Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).  
n
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Flash Units  
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes.  
Speedlight  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX,  
SB-28, SB-26, SB-25,  
SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-22S,  
SB-23, SB-29 3,  
Flash mode  
SB-24  
SB-50DX 1  
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B 3, SB-29S 3  
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
G
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4  
1 In P, S, A, and M modes, lower built-in flash and use optional flash unit only.  
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto  
flash).  
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-NIKKOR ED 105mm f/2.8G and AF-S Micro-NIKKOR 60mm  
f/2.8G ED lenses only.  
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer  
to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D5000 is not included in the  
“digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.  
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, the flash will fire with  
every shot even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used (l, m, r, t, u, v, x, y,  
z, 1, 2 and 3).  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200. At values over  
3200, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the  
flash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has  
fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed.  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct  
exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot  
metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the  
monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other  
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.  
If the controls on the optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SU-800 flash unit are used to set  
flash compensation, Y will appear in the information display.  
n
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units (Continued)  
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:  
SB-900: Active AF-assist illumination is available for all  
focus points; with 17–135 mm AF lenses, however,  
autofocus is not available with the focus points shown in  
gray.  
17–105 mm  
24–34 mm  
106–135 mm  
35–105 mm  
SB-800, SB-600 and SU-800: With 24–105 mm AF lenses, active  
AF-assist illumination is not available with the focus  
points shown in gray.  
With other flash units, the camera AF-assist illuminator is  
used for AF-assist illumination and red-eye reduction.  
n
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D5000.  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL9a (016–17): Additional EN-EL9a batteries are  
available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives. The EN-EL9a can  
be recharged using an MH-23 quick charger. EN-EL9 batteries can also be used.  
Quick Charger MH-23 (016): The MH-23 can be used to recharge EN-EL9a and  
EN-EL9 batteries.  
Power Connector EP-5, AC Adapter EH-5a: These accessories can be used to power the  
camera for extended periods (EH-5 AC adapters can also be used). The EP-5 is  
required to connect the camera to the EH-5a or EH-5; see page 204 for details.  
Power  
sources  
Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-on, slip-in, and rear-  
interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters manufactured by other makers may  
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.  
The D5000 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL circular  
polarizing filter instead.  
Filters  
The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens.  
To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed  
against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.  
Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors  
(filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,  
ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for details.  
DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0,  
+0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the  
neutral position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired focus  
can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control (–1.7 to +0.7 m–1).  
Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus  
can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used with eyepiece correction  
lenses.  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
Optional  
flash units  
(0198)  
Nikon Speedlights SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400  
Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200  
Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800  
Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package.  
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer and save  
photographs directly to the computer hard disk.  
Software  
Body cap  
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an auto  
update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet. See the websites  
listed on page xvi for the latest information on supported operating systems.  
The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust  
when a lens is not in place.  
n
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ML-L3 wireless remote control (067): Use as a remote shutter release for self-portraits  
or to prevent blur caused by camera shake. The ML-L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery.  
Remote  
controls  
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q), insert a fingernail into the gap  
and open the battery chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the  
correct orientation (r).  
The D5000 is equipped with an accessory terminal for  
MC-DC2 remote cords (086) and GP-1 GPS units  
(0114), which connect with the 4mark on the  
connector aligned with the 2mark next to the  
Accessory  
terminal  
accessory terminal as shown at right (to access the  
accessory terminal, open the connector cover; close the  
cover when the terminal is not in use).  
accessories  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D5000.  
All cards of the designated make and capacity can be used, regardless of speed.  
SanDisk 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB , 8 GB , 16 GB †  
Toshiba 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB , 8 GB , 16 GB , 32 GB †  
Panasonic 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB , 6 GB , 8 GB , 12 GB , 16 GB , 32 GB †  
512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB , 8 GB †  
Lexar Media Platinum II: 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB 8 GB †  
Professional: 1 GB, 2 GB *, 4 GB 8 GB †  
*
If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that the device supports 2GB cards.  
† SDHC compliant. If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that the device  
supports SDHC.  
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please  
contact the manufacturer.  
n
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter  
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.  
1 Ready the camera.  
Open the battery-chamber (q) and power connector (w)  
covers.  
2 Insert the EP-5 power connector.  
Be sure to insert the connector in the correct orientation.  
3 Close the battery-chamber cover.  
Position the power connector cable so that it passes  
through the power connector slot and close the battery-  
chamber cover.  
4 Connect the AC adapter.  
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter (e) and  
the EP-5 power cable to the DC socket (r). A P icon is displayed in the  
monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.  
e
r
n
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, return the monitor to the  
storage position, remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the  
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-  
ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in  
locations that:  
are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After  
Camera  
body  
using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly  
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign  
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.  
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If  
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To  
remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft  
cloth and clean with care.  
Lens,  
mirror, and  
viewfinder  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,  
wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,  
as this could result in damage or malfunction.  
Monitor  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the  
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one  
to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to  
these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the  
camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as  
lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or  
serviced.  
n
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Low-Pass Filter  
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass  
filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in  
photographs, you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the  
setup menu. The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or  
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.  
“Clean Now”  
1 Place the camera base down.  
Image sensor cleaning is most effective  
when the camera is placed base down as  
shown at right.  
2 Display the Clean image sensor menu.  
Press the G button to display the menus.  
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup  
menu and press 2.  
G button  
3 Select Clean now.  
Highlight Clean now and press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed while cleaning is in progress.  
n
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”  
1 Select Clean at startup/shutdown.  
Display the Clean image sensor menu as  
described in Step 2 on the previous page.  
Highlight Clean at startup/shutdown and  
press 2.  
2 Select an option.  
Highlight one of the following options and  
press J.  
Option  
Description  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the  
camera is turned on.  
5 Clean at startup  
Clean at  
6
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown  
each time the camera is turned off.  
shutdown  
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at  
7
8
& shutdown  
Cleaning off  
shutdown.  
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Using camera controls interrupts image sensor cleaning. Image sensor cleaning may not be  
performed at startup if the flash is on.  
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not be fully removed using  
the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0208) or  
consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.  
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning  
may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be  
performed again after a short wait.  
n
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Cleaning  
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using the Clean image  
sensor option in the setup menu (0206), the filter can be cleaned manually as  
described below. Note, however, that the filter is extremely delicate and easily  
damaged. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized  
service personnel.  
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.  
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low-pass  
filter. Turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL9a battery or connect  
an optional EP-5 power connector and EH-5a AC adapter.  
2 Remove the lens.  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.  
Turn the camera on and press the G  
button to display the menus. Highlight Lock  
mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu  
and press 2(note that this option is not  
available at battery levels of H or below).  
G button  
4 Press J.  
The message shown at right will be displayed in the  
monitor. To restore normal operation without inspecting  
the low-pass filter, turn the camera off.  
5 Raise the mirror.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The  
mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open,  
revealing the low-pass filter.  
6 Examine the low-pass filter.  
Holding the camera so that light falls on the low-pass filter,  
examine the filter for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are  
present, proceed to Step 8.  
n
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Clean the filter.  
Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower. Do  
not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage the  
filter. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only  
be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the  
filter.  
8 Turn the camera off.  
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.  
Replace the lens or body cap.  
A Use a Reliable Power Source  
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror  
is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the  
following precautions:  
Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is  
raised.  
If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp  
will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after  
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.  
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact  
with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D5000, however, is designed to  
be used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses  
are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the  
low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To  
protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with  
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be  
adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter as described  
above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs  
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2  
(available separately; 0202) or the clean image options available in some third-party  
imaging applications.  
n
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera and Battery:  
Cautions  
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.  
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed  
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur  
when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the  
device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before  
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment  
that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or  
the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the  
monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light  
source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or  
produce a white blur effect in photographs.  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or  
remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.  
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to  
product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid  
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected.  
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then  
wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any  
sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.  
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower.  
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove  
fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth  
and wipe the lens carefully.  
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0206, 208) for information on cleaning the low-pass filter.  
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under  
no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or  
subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear  
the curtain.  
n
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If the  
product will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and  
store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera  
case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant  
gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the  
camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.  
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery  
away.  
Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light.  
This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction. Images recorded  
with the product are unaffected.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.  
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint  
on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a  
soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury  
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes and mouth.  
Return the monitor to the storage position before transporting the camera or leaving it  
unattended.  
Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be  
removed with a soft, dry cloth before use.  
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when  
handling batteries:  
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.  
The battery may become hot when used for extended periods. Observe due caution when  
handling the battery.  
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.  
After removing the battery from the camera, be sure to replace the terminal cover.  
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a  
spare EN-EL9a battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be  
difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice.  
On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged  
before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and  
exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.  
n
Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in accord with local  
regulations.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Available Settings  
The following tables list the settings that can be adjusted in each mode.  
Modes Available from the Mode Dial  
i
j
k
l
p
m
n
o
P
S
A
M
Set Picture Control  
Image quality 1  
Image size 1  
White balance 1  
ISO sensitivity settings 1  
Active D-Lighting 1  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
Active folder  
Movie settings  
Interval timer shooting  
Release mode 1  
Focus mode 1  
AE-L/AF-L button hold 1  
Flexible program 1  
Metering 1  
Exposure compensation 1  
Bracketing 1  
Flash mode 1  
2
2
2 2 2  
Flash compensation 1  
a1: AF-area mode 1  
a2: Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a3: Live view autofocus 1  
a4: Rangefinder  
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl.  
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2: Auto off timers  
c3: Self-timer  
c4: Remote on duration  
d1: Beep  
d2: Viewfinder grid display  
d3: ISO display  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
d4: File number sequence  
d5: Exposure delay mode  
d6: Date imprint  
n
d7: Live view display options  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
i
j
k
l
p
m
n
o
P
S
A
M
e1: Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e2: Auto bracketing set  
f1: Assign E/Fn button  
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f3: Reverse dial rotation  
f4: No memory card?  
f5: Reverse indicators  
1 Reset with two-button reset (078).  
2 Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting.  
3 Reset with Custom Setting A (Reset Custom Settings).  
hModes  
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
0
1
2
3
Set Picture Control  
Image quality 1  
Image size 1  
White balance  
ISO sensitivity settings 1  
Active D-Lighting  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
Active folder  
Movie settings  
Interval timer shooting  
Release mode 1  
✔ ✔  
Focus mode 1  
AE-L/AF-L button hold 1  
Flexible program  
Metering  
Exposure compensation  
Bracketing  
Flash mode 1, 2  
Flash compensation  
a1: AF-area mode 1, 2  
a2: Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
a3: Live view autofocus 1, 2  
a4: Rangefinder  
✔ ✔  
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl.  
n
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
0
1
2
3
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L  
c2: Auto off timers  
c3: Self-timer  
c4: Remote on duration  
d1: Beep  
d2: Viewfinder grid display  
d3: ISO display  
d4: File number sequence  
d5: Exposure delay mode  
d6: Date imprint  
d7: Live view display options  
e1: Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
e2: Auto bracketing set  
f1: Assign E/Fn button  
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f3: Reverse dial rotation  
f4: No memory card?  
f5: Reverse indicators  
1 Reset with two-button reset (078).  
2 Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting.  
3 Reset with Custom Setting A (Reset Custom Settings).  
n
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Card Capacity  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on  
a 4 GB SanDisk Extreme III 30MB/s Edition SDHC card at different image quality and  
size settings.  
Image quality  
Image size  
File size 1  
16.7 MB  
14.0 MB  
12.1 MB  
13.4 MB  
12.3 MB  
11.3 MB  
12.0 MB  
11.5 MB  
11.0 MB  
10.6 MB  
5.9 MB  
3.3 MB  
1.5 MB  
3.0 MB  
1.7 MB  
0.8 MB  
1.5 MB  
0.9 MB  
0.4 MB  
No. of images 1  
180  
Buffer capacity 2  
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
11  
63  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
NEF +  
210  
238  
215  
235  
252  
238  
250  
259  
268  
549  
969  
2100  
1000  
1800  
4100  
2100  
3600  
7700  
JPEG fine 3  
NEF +  
JPEG normal 3  
NEF +  
JPEG basic 3  
NEF (RAW)  
JPEG fine  
JPEG normal  
JPEG basic  
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.  
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer. Drops if ISO sensitivity is set to  
Hi 0.3 or higher, High ISO NR is on when ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher, or long exposure noise  
reduction or auto distortion control (0150) is on.  
3 Image size applies to JPEG images only. Size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed. File size is the  
total for NEF (RAW) and JPEG images.  
n
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Program  
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph:  
F (lens focal length) 55 mm  
55mm < F 135 mm  
135 mm < F  
f1  
f1.4  
f2  
f2.8  
f4  
f5.6  
f8  
f11  
f16  
f22  
f32  
Shutter speed  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph  
assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent. When matrix metering is used,  
values over 171/3 EV are reduced to 171/3 EV.  
n
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below  
before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative.  
Display  
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece correction lenses  
(025, 202).  
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (016, 28).  
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers,  
0157).  
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If  
information display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutter-release  
button, confirm that On is selected for Auto Information Display (0168) and that battery is  
charged.  
Camera does not respond to controls: See “A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras,below.  
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness of this display vary  
with temperature.  
A A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras  
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may  
appear in the monitor and the camera may stop  
Memory card  
functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is  
slot cover  
caused by a strong external static charge. Turn the  
camera off, remove and replace the battery, taking  
care to avoid burns, and turn the camera on again, or, if  
you are using an AC adapter (available separately),  
disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the  
Reset button  
camera on again. If the problem persists, turn the camera off, open the memory card slot  
cover and, using a paper clip, press the reset button by the memory card slot (this also resets  
the camera clock). Note that disconnecting the power source or pressing the reset button  
may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem  
occurred. Data already recorded to the card will not be affected. In the event of continued  
malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.  
n
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting (All Modes)  
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (024, 29, 22).  
Built-in flash is charging (032).  
Camera is not in focus (031).  
CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f-number (0194).  
Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (0195).  
Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f4 (No memory card?, 0164).  
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage  
is approximately 95%.  
Photos are out of focus:  
AF-S or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S or AF-I lens or focus manually.  
Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock (058, 60).  
Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually (060).  
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus  
when AF-C focus mode is selected or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode.  
Can not select focus point:  
Auto-area selected for AF-area mode: choose another mode (056).  
Face priority or subject tracking AF selected in live view (043).  
Press shutter-release button halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters (029).  
Can not select subject tracking autofocus mode: Monochrome Picture Control selected (0107).  
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (054).  
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (063).  
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0151).  
Randomly-spaced bright pixels (“noise”) appear in photos:  
Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise reduction on (0151).  
Shutter speed is slower than 8 s: use long exposure noise reduction (0151).  
AF-assist illuminator does not light:  
Camera is in l, m, r, t, u, v, or w mode: select another mode (033).  
AF-assist lamp does not light for continuous-servo autofocus. Choose AF-S. In single-point,  
dynamic-area, or 3D-tracking AF, select center focus point (058).  
Off selected for Custom Setting a2 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator, 0155).  
Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use;  
wait for lamp to cool down.  
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:  
Replace battery in remote control (0203).  
Choose remote control mode (065, 67).  
Flash is charging (032).  
Time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration) has passed: reselect remote  
control mode (0157).  
n
Bright light is interfering with remote.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem persists, perform  
image sensor cleaning (0206).  
Date is not imprinted on photographs: NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for  
image quality (062, 160).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.  
Shooting (P, S, A, M)  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (0195).  
Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “bulb” or “time” selected in mode M: choose  
new shutter speed (082).  
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use (072).  
Colors are unnatural:  
Adjust white balance to match light source (096).  
Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0106).  
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0100).  
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created with D5000  
(0102).  
White balance bracketing unavailable: NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for  
image quality (063).  
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or  
saturation. For consistent results over a series of photos, choose another setting (0109).  
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (089).  
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose mode P, S, or A (090).  
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting mode: Lower built-in  
flash (066).  
Reddish areas appear in photos or textures are uneven: Reddish areas and uneven textures may appear  
in long time-exposures. Turn long exposure noise reduction on when shooting at shutter  
speeds of “bulb” or “time” (0151).  
n
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
Flashing areas, shooting data, or graphs appear on images: Press 1or 3to choose photo information  
displayed, or change settings for Display mode (0117, 146).  
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF + JPEG (063).  
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is  
automatically selected after photograph is taken (0146).  
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:  
Select On for Rotate tall (0147).  
Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0170).  
Camera orientation was changed while shutter-release button was pressed in continuous  
release mode or camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (066).  
Photo is displayed in image review (0147).  
Can not delete picture:  
Picture is protected: remove protection (0125).  
Memory card is locked (024).  
Can not retouch picture:  
Photo can not be further edited with D5000 (0175).  
Picture is a movie: movies can not be retouched (0174).  
Can not change print order:  
Memory card is full: delete pictures (029).  
Memory card is locked (024).  
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW)  
processing or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX 2  
(0134).  
Picture is not displayed on TV: Choose correct video mode (0168).  
Picture is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable (available separately)  
is connected (0133).  
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card  
reader to copy photos to computer (0134).  
NEF (RAW) photos not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0202).  
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the  
position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor  
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is  
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not  
be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed (0171).  
Miscellaneous  
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (021, 169).  
n
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings  
or when no memory card is inserted (015, 22, 174).  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder and  
monitor.  
A Warning Icons  
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a warning or error message  
can be displayed in the monitor by pressing the Q (W) button.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Lock lens aperture ring  
at minimum aperture  
(largest f/-number).  
B
Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture  
19,  
194  
(blinks) (largest f-number).  
Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens.  
If non-CPU lens is attached, select mode M.  
F/s  
(blinks)  
18  
195  
Lens not attached.  
Shutter-release disabled.  
Recharge battery.  
Turn camera off and recharge or replace battery. 16, 17  
This battery can not be used.  
Choose battery designated  
for use in this camera.  
Initialization error.  
Turn camera off and then on  
again.  
Battery level is low.  
Complete operation and turn  
camera off immediately.  
d
(blinks)  
Use Nikon-approved battery (EN-EL9a).  
202  
17, 28  
209  
Turn camera off, remove and replace battery, and  
then turn camera on again.  
End cleaning and turn camera off and recharge or  
replace battery.  
21,  
169  
Clock not set.  
Set camera clock.  
Turn camera off and confirm that card is correctly  
inserted.  
Memory card is locked (write protected). Slide  
card write-protect switch to “write” position.  
Use approved card.  
Format card. If problem persists, card may be  
damaged. Contact Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Error creating new folder. Delete files or insert  
new memory card.  
No memory card.  
S
22  
24  
Memory card is locked.  
Slide lock to “write” position.  
(
(blinks)  
203  
23  
This memory card cannot be  
used. Card may be damaged.  
Insert another card.  
k
(blinks)  
40,  
126  
22  
Insert new memory card.  
This card is not formatted.  
Format card?  
T
Format card or turn camera off and insert new  
23  
(blinks) memory card.  
Reduce quality or size.  
Delete photographs.  
62  
40,  
126  
22  
j
(blinks)  
Card is full  
n
Insert new memory card.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
31,  
55, 60  
Camera can not focus using autofocus. Change  
(blinks) composition or focus manually.  
Use a lower ISO sensitivity  
Use commercial ND filter  
74  
Subject is too bright.  
q
r
In mode:  
S Increase shutter speed  
A Choose a smaller aperture (larger f-number)  
Use a higher ISO sensitivity  
Use flash  
In mode:  
S Lower shutter speed  
82  
83  
74  
70  
Subject is too dark.  
No Bulb in S mode.  
82  
83  
A Choose a larger aperture (smaller f-number)  
A
(blinks)  
&
Change shutter speed or select manual exposure  
mode.  
82, 84  
(blinks)  
Menus and playback not available during interval  
timer shooting. To end interval timer shooting,  
turn camera off.  
Flash has fired at full power. Check photo in  
monitor; if underexposed, adjust settings and try  
again.  
Interval timer shooting  
N
(blinks)  
Flash is in TTL mode. Choose  
another setting or use a CPU  
lens.  
Change flash mode setting on optional flash unit  
or use CPU lens.  
194  
Use the flash.  
Change distance to subject, aperture, flash  
range, or ISO sensitivity.  
Optional SB-400 flash unit attached: flash is in  
bounce position or focus distance is very short.  
Continue shooting; if necessary, increase focus  
distance to prevent shadows from appearing in  
photograph.  
70  
73,  
74,83  
N/s  
(blinks)  
Error occurred updating firmware for optional  
flash unit. Contact Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Flash error  
Eye-Fi upload could not be  
disabled.  
The card is still transmitting  
and pictures may be  
uploaded.  
The Eye-Fi card is still transmitting data after  
Disable has been selected for Eye-Fi upload. To  
terminate wireless transmission, turn the camera  
off and remove the card.  
173  
n
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Release shutter. If error persists or appears  
frequently, consult Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Error. Press shutter release  
button again.  
Start-up error. Contact a  
Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Autoexposure error. Contact  
a Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
O
(blinks)  
Consult Nikon-authorized service representative.  
Folder selected for playback contains no images.  
Insert another memory card or select a different  
folder.  
File has been created or modified using a  
computer or different make of camera, or file is  
corrupt.  
Memory card does not contain NEF (RAW) images  
for use with NEF (RAW) processing.  
Check printer. To resume, select Continue (if  
available).  
Paper is not selected size. Insert paper of correct  
size and select Continue.  
22,  
146  
Folder contains no images.  
File does not contain image  
data.  
Cannot select this file.  
175  
184  
No image for retouching.  
Check printer.  
*
*
Check paper.  
*
Paper jam.  
Clear jam and select Continue.  
*
Out of paper.  
Check ink supply.  
Out of ink.  
Insert paper of selected size and select Continue.  
Check ink. To resume, select Continue.  
Replace ink and select Continue.  
*
*
* See printer manual for more information.  
n
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Nikon D5000 Digital Camera  
Type  
Type  
Lens mount  
Single-lens reflex digital camera  
Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)  
Effective picture angle Approx. 1.5 × lens focal length (Nikon DX format)  
Effective pixels  
Effective pixels  
12.3 million  
Image sensor  
Image sensor  
Total pixels  
23.6 × 15.8 mm CMOS sensor  
12.9 million  
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional  
Capture NX 2 software required)  
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
4,288 × 2,848 (L)  
3,216 × 2,136 (M)  
2,144 × 1,424 (S)  
File format  
NEF (RAW)  
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.  
1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and  
JPEG formats  
Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,  
Landscape; storage for additional custom Picture Controls  
Media  
File system  
SD (Secure Digital) memory cards, SDHC-compliant  
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order  
Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still  
Cameras), PictBridge  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex viewfinder  
Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Eyepoint  
Diopter adjustment  
Focusing screen  
Approx. 0.78 × (50mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1  
)
17.9 mm (–1.0 m–1  
–1.7–+0.7 m–1  
)
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark V screen with focus frame (framing  
grid can be displayed)  
Reflex mirror  
Lens aperture  
Quick return  
Instant return, electronically controlled  
n
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lens  
Compatible lenses  
AF-S or AF-I: All functions supported.  
Type G or D AF NIKKOR without built-in autofocus motor: All functions except  
autofocus supported. IX NIKKOR lenses not supported.  
Other AF NIKKOR: All functions supported except autofocus and 3D color  
matrix metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.  
Type D PC NIKKOR: All functions supported except autofocus and some  
shooting modes.  
AI-P NIKKOR: All functions supported except autofocus and 3D color  
matrix metering II.  
Non-CPU: Autofocus not supported. Can be used in mode M, but  
exposure meter does not function.  
Electronic rangefinder can be used if lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6  
or faster.  
Shutter  
Type  
Speed  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter  
1/4000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV, bulb, time (requires optional ML-L3  
wireless remote control)  
Flash sync speed  
X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or slower  
Release  
Release mode  
8 (single frame), I (continuous), E (self-timer), " (delayed remote),  
# (quick response), v (quiet shutter-release)  
Frame advance rate  
Up to 4 fps (manual focus, mode M or S, shutter speed 1/250 s or faster, and  
other settings at default values)  
Self-timer  
Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration and from 1 to 9 shots  
Exposure  
Metering  
TTL exposure metering using 420-pixel RGB sensor  
Metering method  
Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix  
metering II (other CPU lenses)  
Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 8-mm circle in center of frame  
Spot: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on selected  
focus point  
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Exposure meter  
coupling  
Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV  
Spot metering: 2–20 EV  
CPU  
Mode  
Auto modes (i auto; j auto (flash off)); scene modes (k portrait;  
l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up; o night portrait; r night  
landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; v dusk/dawn;  
w pet portrait; x candlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food;  
1 silhouette; 2 high key; 3 low key); programmed auto with flexible  
program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual  
(M)  
n
Exposure  
compensation  
–5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV  
Exposure bracketing 3 frames in steps of 1/3 or ½ EV  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure  
White balance  
bracketing  
3 frames in steps of 1  
ADL bracketing  
Exposure lock  
ISO sensitivity  
(Recommended  
Exposure Index)  
Active D-Lighting  
2 frames  
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button  
ISO 200 – 3200 in steps of 1/3 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or  
1 EV (ISO 100 equivalent) below ISO 200 or to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO  
6400 equivalent) above ISO 3200.  
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off  
Focus  
Autofocus  
Nikon Multi-CAM 1000 autofocus module with TTL phase detection, 11  
focus points (including one cross-type sensor), and AF-assist illuminator  
(range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.)  
Detection range  
Lens servo  
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Autofocus (AF): Instant single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C);  
auto AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated  
automatically according to subject status  
Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be used  
Focus point  
AF-area mode  
Focus lock  
Can be selected from 11 focus points  
Single point, dynamic area, auto-area, 3D-tracking (11 points)  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-  
servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button  
Flash  
Built-in flash  
i, k, p, n, o, s, w: Auto flash with auto pop-up  
0, P, S, A, M: Manual pop-up with button release  
Guide Number (m/ft.,  
at 20 °C/68 °F)  
Flash control  
At ISO 200: Approx. 17/56, 18/59 with manual flash  
At ISO 100: Approx. 12/39, 13/43 with manual flash  
TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR  
using 420-pixel RGB sensor are available with built-in flash and SB-900,  
SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400 (i-TTL balanced fill-flash is available when  
matrix or center-weighted metering is selected)  
Auto aperture: Available with SB-900, SB-800 and CPU lens  
Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900, SB-800, SB-80DX,  
SB-28DX, SB-28, SB-27, and SB-22S  
Range-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800  
Flash mode  
i, k, p, n, s, w: Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, off; fill-flash and  
red-eye reduction available with optional flash units  
o: Auto slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, off; slow  
sync and slow sync with red-eye reduction available with optional  
flash units  
l, m, r, t, u, v, x, y, z, 1, 2, 3: Fill-flash and red-eye reduction  
available with optional flash units  
0: Fill-flash  
P, A: Fill-flash, rear-curtain with slow sync, slow sync, slow sync with  
red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction  
n
S, M: Fill-flash, rear-curtain sync, red-eye reduction  
Flash compensation  
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or ½ EV  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash  
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit such as SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is fully charged; blinks for  
3 s after flash is fired at full output  
Accessory shoe  
Standard ISO 518 hot-shoe contact with safety lock  
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built-in flash, SB-900,  
System (CLS)  
SB-800, or SU-800 as commander; Flash Color Information  
Communication supported with built-in flash and all CLS-compatible  
flash units  
Sync terminal  
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)  
White balance  
White balance  
Auto (TTL white-balance with main image sensor and 420 segment RGB  
sensor); 12 manual modes with fine-tuning; preset white balance; white  
balance bracketing  
Live view  
AF modes  
Autofocus  
Face priority, wide area, normal area, subject tracking  
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point  
automatically when face-priority AF or subject tracking is selected)  
Movie  
Image size (pixels)  
1,280 × 720/24 fps  
320 × 216/24 fps  
AVI  
640 × 424/24 fps  
File format  
Compression  
Motion-JPEG  
Monitor  
Monitor  
2.7-in., approx. 230k-dot, vari-angle TFT LCD, with 100% frame coverage  
and brightness adjustment  
Playback  
Playback  
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with  
playback zoom, movie playback, stop-motion movie playback, slide  
show, histogram display, highlights, auto image rotation, and image  
comment (up to 36 characters)  
Interface  
USB  
Hi-Speed USB  
Video output  
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL; images can be displayed on  
external device while camera monitor is on  
Type C HDMI connector; camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is  
connected.  
HDMI output  
Accessory terminal  
Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)  
GPS unit: GP-1 (available separately)  
Supported languages  
Supported languages Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish,  
French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish,  
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish  
n
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power source  
Battery  
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL9a battery  
AC adapter  
EH-5a AC adapter; requires EP-5 power connector (available separately)  
Tripod socket  
Tripod socket  
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)  
Dimensions/weight  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
Weight  
Approx. 127 × 104 × 80 mm (5.0 × 4.1 × 3.1 in.)  
Approx. 560 g (1 lb. 3.8 oz.) without battery, memory card, or body cap  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)  
Humidity  
Less than 85% (no condensation)  
Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at  
an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software  
described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable  
for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
MH-23 quick charger  
Rated input  
AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz)  
Rated output  
DC 8.4 V/900 mA  
Supported batteries  
Charging time  
Nikon EN-EL9a or EN-EL9 rechargeable Li-ion battery  
Approx. 1 hour and 40 minutes (EN-E9a) or 1 hour and 30 minutes  
(EN-EL9) when battery is fully discharged  
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)  
Dimensions  
Approx. 82.5 × 28 × 65mm (3.2 × 1.1 × 2.6 in.)  
(W × H × D)  
Length of cord  
Weight  
Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.)  
Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding power cable  
EN-EL9a rechargeable Li-ion battery  
Type  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
Rated capacity  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
Weight  
7.2 V/1080 mAh  
Approx. 36 × 14 × 56 mm (1.4 × 0.6 × 2.2 in.)  
Approx. 51 g (1.8 oz.), excluding terminal cover  
n
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens  
Type  
G-type AF-S DX Zoom-NIKKOR lens with built-in CPU and Nikon bayonet  
mount  
Supported cameras  
Focal length  
Nikon digital SLR cameras (DX format)  
18–55mm  
Maximum aperture  
Construction  
Picture angle  
f/3.5–5.6  
11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical element)  
76 °–28 ° 50 ´  
Focal length scale (mm) 18, 24, 35, 45, 55  
Distance information Output to camera  
Zoom control  
Zoom adjusted by rotating separate zoom ring  
Focusing  
Vibration reduction  
Autofocus with Silent Wave Motor; manual focus  
Lens-shift method using voice coil motors (VCMs)  
Closest focus distance 0.28 m (11 in.) from focal plane mark (061) at all zoom settings  
Diaphragm  
Aperture range  
Metering  
Seven-blade diaphragm with rounded blades and fully automatic aperture  
f/3.5–22 at 18 mm; f/5.6–36 at 55 mm  
Maximum aperture  
Attachment size  
Dimensions  
52 mm (P=0.75 mm)  
Approx. 73 mm diameter × 79.5 mm/2.9 × 3.1 in. (from surface of  
bayonet mount to end of lens)  
Weight  
Approx. 265 g (9.3 oz.)  
Lens hood  
HB-45 (available separately; attaches as shown below)  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described  
in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages  
that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
n
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supported Standards  
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely  
used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes  
of camera.  
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows  
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.  
Exif version 2.21: The D5000 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for  
Digital Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which information stored with  
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output  
on Exif-compliant printers.  
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and  
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without  
first transferring them to a computer.  
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces  
used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual  
data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.  
Trademark Information  
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Microsoft,  
Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The SD logo is a trademark of the SD  
Card Association. PictBridge and the SDHC logo are trademarks. HDMI, the HDMI logo and  
High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation  
provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective  
holders.  
n
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Life  
The number of shots that can be taken with fully-charged batteries varies with the  
condition of the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. Sample figures  
for EN-EL9a (1080 mAh) batteries are given below.  
Single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1): Approximately 510 shots  
Continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2): Approximately 2900 shots  
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm  
f/3.5–5.6G VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity  
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every  
30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on for 4 s; tester waits for  
exposure meters to turn off after monitor is turned off; flash fired at full power  
once every other shot. Live view not used.  
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens  
under the following test conditions: continuous release mode, focus mode set  
to AF-C, image quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium), white  
balance set to v, ISO sensitivity set to ISO 200, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus  
cycled from infinity to minimum range three times after shutter-release button  
has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are then taken in succession and  
monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off; cycle repeated once exposure  
meters have turned off.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
Using the monitor  
Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
Repeated autofocus operations  
Taking NEF (RAW) photographs  
Slow shutter speeds  
Using a GP-1 GPS unit  
Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL9a batteries:  
Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.  
Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left  
unused.  
n
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Border (PictBridge) ............ 138, 141  
Bracketing....................103, 162, 163  
Built-in AF-assist illuminator ....155  
Bulb..................................................... 86  
Burst.................................................... 66  
Symbols  
Numerics  
i (Auto mode)................................ 28  
j (Auto (flash off) mode) ........... 28  
k (Portrait) ....................................... 34  
l (Landscape)................................. 34  
p (Child)............................................ 34  
m (Sports).......................................... 34  
n (Close up)..................................... 35  
o (Night portrait)........................... 35  
r (Night landscape)...................... 35  
s (Party/indoor)............................. 35  
t (Beach/snow).............................. 36  
u (Sunset)......................................... 36  
v (Dusk/dawn) ............................... 36  
w (Pet portrait) ............................... 36  
x (Candlelight)................................. 37  
y (Blossom)...................................... 37  
z (Autumn colors)......................... 37  
0 (Food)............................................. 37  
1 (Silhouette).................................. 38  
2 (High key)..................................... 38  
3 (Low key)...................................... 38  
P (Programmed auto).................... 81  
S (Shutter-priority auto) ............... 82  
A (Aperture-priority auto)............ 83  
M (Manual) ........................................ 84  
U (flexible program) ...................... 81  
a (Live view)............................ 42, 50  
m (White balance) ........................ 96  
L (Preset manual) ...................... 99  
8 (Single frame) ............................ 65  
I (Continuous).............................. 65  
E (Self-timer)...................65, 67, 157  
" (Delayed remote) ............ 65, 67  
# (Quick-response remote) .. 65, 67  
v (Quiet shutter-release) ........... 65  
L (Matrix) ......................................... 88  
M (Center-weighted) .................... 88  
N (Spot)............................................. 88  
e (AE bracketing) ......................103  
f (White balance bracketing)......  
103  
3D color matrix metering II......... 88  
3D-tracking ...................................... 57  
3D-tracking (11 points) (AF-area  
mode) ............................................... 57  
420-pixel RGB sensor .................... 88  
C
Calendar ..........................................123  
Calendar playback .......................123  
Camera Control Pro 2........ 134, 202  
Center-weighted ............................ 88  
Charging a battery......................... 16  
Clean image sensor.....................206  
Clock ..........................................20, 169  
Clock battery.................................... 21  
Cloudy (White balance) ............... 96  
CLS.....................................................198  
Color balance.................................179  
Color outline ..................................186  
Color space.....................................150  
Color temperature ......................... 97  
Compatible lens............................194  
Computer........................................134  
Connecting a GPS to the camera...  
114  
Continuous (Release mode)....... 65  
Continuous-servo AF .................... 54  
CPU contacts..................................194  
CPU lens....................................19, 194  
Creative Lighting System ..........198  
Cross screen (Filter effects).......178  
Custom Settings ...........................153  
Cyanotype.......................................178  
A
A/V cable.........................................132  
AC adapter............................ 202, 204  
Accessories .....................................202  
Active D-Lighting........ 94, 103, 163  
Active D-Lighting bracketing .103,  
163  
Active folder...................................152  
Add items (MY MENU)................191  
ADL bracketing ................... 103, 163  
Adobe RGB .....................................150  
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing  
set)...................................................103  
AE-L ............................................89, 164  
AE-L/AF-L button................59, 89, 164  
AF..................................................54–59  
AF assist................... 31, 55, 155, 197  
AF-area mode.........................56, 155  
A-M switch................................. 18, 60  
Amber........................................98, 179  
Aperture ..................................... 80, 83  
Aperture-priority auto.................. 83  
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ...........164  
Assign E/Fn button .....................163  
Attaching the lens.......................... 18  
Audio video cable........................132  
Auto (White balance).................... 96  
Auto bracketing set........... 103, 162  
Auto dim..........................................166  
Auto distortion control ..............150  
Auto image rotation....................170  
Auto information display ..........168  
Auto meter off........................29, 157  
Auto off timers ..............................157  
Auto-area (AF-area mode) .......... 57  
Autofocus...................................54–59  
Auto-servo AF.................................. 54  
Available Settings ........................212  
D
Date and time.........................20, 169  
Date counter........................ 160, 161  
Date format .............................20, 169  
Date imprint...................................160  
Daylight saving time............20, 169  
DCF version 2.0 ................... 150, 230  
Default settings .....................78, 154  
Delayed remote (Release mode)....  
65, 67  
Delete........................................40, 126  
Delete all images..........................127  
Delete current image...........40, 126  
Delete selected images..............127  
Digital Print Order Format........136,  
139, 143, 230  
g (ADL bracketing).............103  
Y (Flash compensation) ............ 92  
E (Exposure compensation)...... 90  
R (Information) button..................8  
P (Information edit) button.........9  
d (Help)............................................. 13  
I (focus indicator)........... 31, 58, 61  
N (flash-ready indicator).............. 32  
3 (“Beep” indicator).....................158  
+ NEF (RAW)...................................163  
B
Battery.................................. 16, 17, 28  
Beep..................................................158  
Black-and-white............................178  
Blue ............................................98, 179  
Blue intensifier (Filter effects)..178  
Body cap.............................. 3, 18, 202  
Diopter adjustment control ...... 25,  
202  
Direct sunlight (White balance) 96  
Display mode.................................146  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Distortion control ........................185  
D-Lighting ......................................176  
DPOF.....................136, 139, 143, 230  
Dynamic area....................................57  
Lens mount ...........................3, 18, 61  
Lens VR switch................................. 18  
Live view............................41, 49, 155  
Live view autofocus.....................155  
Live view display options..........161  
Lo (Sensitivity).......................... 74, 75  
Lock mirror up for cleaning......208  
Long exp. NR..................................151  
Long time-exposure with remote  
control.............................................. 86  
G
GPS...........................................114, 121  
GPS data..........................................121  
Green.........................................98, 179  
Green intensifier (Filter effects)......  
178  
E
EV steps for exposure cntrl.......156  
Exif version 2.21...................150, 230  
Exposure...............................80, 89, 90  
Exposure bracketing..........103, 162  
Exposure compensation...............90  
Exposure delay mode.................159  
Exposure indicator..........................85  
Exposure lock ...................................89  
Exposure meters....................29, 157  
Exposure mode................................80  
Exposure program.......................216  
H
HDMI.............................. 133, 168, 230  
Help..................................................... 13  
Hi (Sensitivity) ...........................74, 75  
High definition........... 133, 168, 230  
High ISO NR....................................151  
Highlights ..............................119, 146  
Histogram..............................118, 146  
M
M (Image size) ................................. 64  
Magenta ...................................98, 179  
Manage Picture Control.............111  
Manual........................................ 60, 84  
Manual focus ............................ 47, 60  
Matrix ................................................. 88  
Maximum aperture ....................... 61  
Maximum sensitivity...................149  
Medium ............................................. 64  
Memory buffer......................... 31, 66  
Memory card .................22, 203, 215  
Memory card capacity................215  
Metering............................................ 88  
Minimum aperture................. 19, 80  
Minimum shutter speed............149  
Mirror........................................... 3, 208  
Monitor.......................7, 42, 116, 166  
Monochrome (Filter effects).....178  
Monochrome (Set Picture Control)  
107  
I
F
Image comment...........................169  
Image Dust Off ref photo..........171  
Image overlay................................182  
Image quality .................................. 62  
Image review.................................147  
Image size......................................... 64  
Incandescent (White balance) .. 96  
Index print......................................142  
Info display format ......................166  
Info wrap-around.........................168  
In-focus indicator..............31, 58, 61  
Information ......................8, 117, 166  
Interval timer shooting................ 76  
ISO display......................................158  
ISO sensitivity.........................74, 149  
ISO sensitivity auto control ......149  
ISO sensitivity settings...............149  
i-TTL ..................................................162  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital  
SLR...................................................162  
Face priority ......................................43  
File information ............................117  
File number sequence................159  
Filter effects...........................109, 178  
Fine-Tuning White Balance..........98  
Firmware version..........................173  
Fisheye.............................................185  
Flash.............................32, 70, 71, 198  
Flash (White balance)....................96  
Flash cntrl for built-in flash.......162  
Flash compensation.......................92  
Flash control ..................................162  
Flash mode........................................71  
Flash range........................................73  
Flash ready indicator ...........32, 200  
Flash sync speed ..........................225  
Flexible program.............................81  
Fluorescent (White balance).......96  
Fn button.........................................163  
f-number..................................83, 194  
Focal length ...................................197  
Focal length scale ...........................18  
Focal plane mark.............................61  
Focus ........................................... 54–61  
Focus indicator...................31, 58, 61  
Focus lock ..........................................58  
Focus mode.......................................54  
Focus point...................30, 54, 58, 61  
Focus tracking..................................57  
Focusing screen............................224  
Focusing the viewfinder...............25  
Focus-mode switch .................18, 60  
Format.................................................23  
Format memory card.....................23  
Frame interval (Slide show)......129  
Front-curtain sync...........................72  
Full-frame playback.....................116  
Mounting index.............................. 18  
Movie settings................................. 51  
Movies................................................ 50  
MY MENU........................................190  
N
NEF ...................................................... 62  
NEF (RAW).......................62, 134, 184  
NEF (RAW) processing................184  
Neutral (Set Picture Control)....107  
Nikon Transfer ......................134, 135  
No memory card? ........................164  
Noise reduction ............................151  
Non-CPU lens ................................195  
Normal area...................................... 43  
Number of shots...........................157  
J
JPEG .................................................... 62  
JPEG basic......................................... 62  
JPEG fine............................................ 62  
JPEG normal..................................... 62  
L
L (Image size)................................... 64  
Landscape (Set Picture Control).....  
107  
Language.................................20, 169  
Large................................................... 64  
LCD....................................................166  
LCD brightness..............................166  
Lens.....................................18, 19, 194  
Lens cap............................................. 18  
Lens focus ring................................ 18  
O
Optional flash................................162  
Overview data...............................121  
P
Page size (PictBridge) ........137, 141  
Perspective control......................186  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Photo info ............................. 117, 146  
PictBridge.............................. 136, 230  
Picture angle..................................197  
Picture Controls .................. 106, 108  
Playback ...................................39, 116  
Playback folder..............................146  
Playback information........ 117, 146  
Playback menu..............................146  
Playback zoom..............................124  
Portrait (Set Picture Control)....107  
Preset manual (White balance) 96,  
99  
Press the shutter-release button  
all the way down .......................... 32  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway...................................... 31, 32  
Print (DPOF)....................................139  
Print select......................................139  
Print set (DPOF).............................143  
Printing ............................................136  
Programmed auto.......................... 81  
Protecting photographs............125  
UTC................................... 20, 114, 121  
S
V
S (Image size)................................... 64  
Self-timer...........................65, 67, 157  
Self-timer delay.............................157  
Sensitivity.................................74, 149  
Sepia .................................................178  
Set Picture Control.......................108  
Setup menu....................................165  
Shade (White balance)................. 96  
Shooting data...................... 119, 120  
Shooting menu.............................148  
Shutter-priority auto..................... 82  
Shutter-release button.. 32, 58, 89,  
156  
Shutter-release button AE-L.....156  
Side-by-side comparison ..........189  
Single point (AF-area mode)...... 57  
Single-frame (Release mode)..... 65  
Single-servo AF............................... 54  
Size ............................................... 51, 64  
Skylight (Filter effects)................178  
Slide show.......................................129  
Slow sync .......................................... 72  
Small ................................................... 64  
Small picture..................................180  
Soft (Filter effects)........................179  
Sound (Movie settings)................ 51  
Speedlight ......................................198  
Spot..................................................... 88  
sRGB..................................................150  
Standard (Set Picture Control).107  
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital  
SLR ...................................................162  
Start printing (PictBridge)138, 141  
Stop-motion movie.....................187  
Straighten .......................................185  
Subject tracking ............................. 43  
Vibration Reduction...................... 19  
Video mode....................................168  
Viewfinder.................... 6, 25, 67, 224  
Viewfinder eyepiece............... 67, 77  
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ...... 67, 77  
Viewfinder grid display ..............158  
ViewNX.............................................134  
Vivid (Set Picture Control).........107  
W
Warm filter (Filter effects)..........178  
WB...............................................96, 103  
WB bracketing...............................103  
White balance.................................. 96  
White balance bracketing.........103  
Wide area .......................................... 43  
Q
Quality (Movie settings)............... 51  
Quick retouch................................185  
Quick-response remote (Release  
mode) ............................................... 65  
Quiet shutter-release (Release  
mode) ............................................... 65  
R
Rangefinder ...................................156  
Rank items (MY MENU) ..............192  
Rear lens cap.................................... 18  
Rear-curtain sync ........................... 72  
Recent settings .............................190  
Red intensifier (Filter effects) ...178  
Red-eye correction ......................176  
Red-eye reduction ......................... 72  
Release mode .................................. 65  
Remote Control...............67, 86, 203  
Remote cord ...........................86, 203  
Remote on duration....................157  
Remove items (MY MENU)........191  
Removing the lens from the  
camera.............................................. 19  
Reset ..........................................78, 154  
Reset custom settings ................154  
Restoring default settings..78, 154  
Retouch menu...............................174  
Reverse dial rotation...................164  
Reverse indicators........................164  
RGB.......................................... 118, 150  
RGB Histogram..............................118  
Rotate tall........................................147  
T
Television ........................................132  
Thumbnail playback ...................122  
Time .................................................... 86  
Time stamp (PictBridge) .. 138, 141  
Time zone.................................20, 169  
Time zone and date..............20, 169  
Timer................................................... 67  
Toning .................................... 109, 110  
Trim ...................................................177  
Two-button reset ........................... 78  
Type D lens .....................................194  
Type G lens .....................................194  
U
USB .......................................... 135, 136  
USB cable .............................. 135, 136  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Cooktop DA 3480 User Manual
Miller Electric Welding System Spectrum 2050 User Manual
Milwaukee Nail Gun 54 43 0040 User Manual
MSi Computer Hardware G52 M7031X1 User Manual
Omron Blood Pressure Monitor 637IT User Manual
Oregon Scientific Thermometer EMR963HG User Manual
Oster Oven Small Digital Oven User Manual
Panasonic Video Gaming Accessories CZ RD516C User Manual
Paradyne Network Card 8820 S1 906 User Manual
Patton electronic Network Card 1015 User Manual